SEARCH:SEARCH
DPO4000 Series
Digital Oscilloscopes
Programmer Manual
www.tektronix.com
071-1845-00
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
For product information, sales, service, and technical support:
In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
Table of Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................. iii
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 1-1
Setting Up Remote Communications...................................................................... 1-2
Command Syntax................................................................................................. 2-1
Command and Query Structure ............................................................................ 2-1
Clearing the Instrument ..................................................................................... 2-3
Command Entry.............................................................................................. 2-4
Constructed Mnemonics .................................................................................... 2-6
Argument Types.............................................................................................. 2-7
Command Groups .............................................................................................. 2-11
Acquisition Command Group ............................................................................ 2-11
Alias Command Group.................................................................................... 2-12
Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group .......................................................... 2-13
Cursor Command Group .................................................................................. 2-14
Display Command Group................................................................................. 2-16
Ethernet Command Group ................................................................................ 2-18
File System Command Group ............................................................................ 2-18
Hard Copy Command Group ............................................................................. 2-19
Horizontal Command Group ............................................................................. 2-20
Mark Command Group.................................................................................... 2-21
Math Command Group.................................................................................... 2-22
Measurement Command Group .......................................................................... 2-23
Miscellaneous Command Group ......................................................................... 2-26
Save and Recall Command Group ....................................................................... 2-28
Search Command Group .................................................................................. 2-29
Status and Error Command Group ....................................................................... 2-32
Trigger Command Group ................................................................................. 2-33
Vertical Command Group................................................................................. 2-41
Waveform Transfer Command Group ................................................................... 2-43
Zoom Command Group ................................................................................... 2-48
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order .................................................................... 2-51
Status and Events ................................................................................................. 3-1
Registers ...................................................................................................... 3-1
Queues ........................................................................................................ 3-4
Event Handling Sequence................................................................................... 3-5
Synchronization Methods ................................................................................... 3-7
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
i
Table of Contents
Programming Examples .........................................................................................
Appendix A: Character Set .....................................................................................
Appendix B: Reserved Words ..................................................................................
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values...................................................................
Appendix D: GPIB Interface Specifications ..................................................................
Glossary
Index
ii
4-1
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Preface
This programmer manual covers my scope
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
iii
Preface
iv
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Getting Started
This programmer guide provides you with the information required to use GPIB
commands for remotely controlling your instrument. With this information, you
can write computer programs that will perform functions such as setting the
front-panel controls, taking measurements, performing statistical calculations, and
exporting data for use in other programs, such as spreadsheets.
Besides the traditional GPIB electronic interface (referred to as the physical
GPIB interface), your instrument is provided with a TekVISA GPIB-compatible
interface (referred to as the virtual GPIB interface). This is a software Application
Programming Interface (API) which enables you to communicate with the
instrument in a variety of ways, including via the internet. With the following two
exceptions, these interfaces are completely independent:
HEADER. Command headers enabled or disabled on one interface are
correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface. Refer to the
command descriptions for more detailed information.
VERBOSE. Verbosity enabled or disabled on one interface is correspondingly
enabled or disabled on the other interface. Refer to the command description
for more detailed information.
Refer to Documentation for information on related manuals and documents.
The programmer guide is divided into the following major topics:
Getting Started. This topic introduces you to the online help and provides
basic information about setting up your instrument for remote control.
Command Syntax. This topic provides an overview of the command syntax
that you will use to communicate with the instrument and other general
information about commands, such as how commands and queries are
constructed, how to enter commands, constructed mnemonics, and argument
types.
Command Groups. This topic contains all the commands listed in functional
groups. Each group consists of an overview of the commands in that group and
a table that lists all the commands and queries for that group. You can click a
command in the listing to display a detailed description of the command.
Status and Events. This topic discusses the status and event reporting system
for the GPIB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events
that occur within the instrument. Topics that are discussed include registers,
queues, event handling sequences, synchronization methods, and messages
that the instrument may return, including error messages.
Miscellaneous. This topic contains miscellaneous information, such as a
list of reserved words, a table of the factory initialization (default) settings,
and GPIB interface specifications that may be helpful when using GPIB
commands to remotely control the instrument.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
1-1
Getting Started
Setting Up Remote Communications
Before setting up the instrument for remote communications using the electronic
(physical) GPIB interface, you should familiarize yourself with the following
GPIB requirements:
A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus. No two
devices can share the same device address.
No more than 15 devices can be connected to any one line.
One device should be connected for every 6 feet (2 meters) of cable used.
No more than 65 feet (20 meters) of cable should be used to connect devices
to a bus.
At least two-thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while
using the network.
Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration. Do not
use loop or parallel configurations.
Connecting to the
Instrument
Your instrument has a 24-pin GPIB connector on its rear (side) panel. This
connector has a D-type shell and conforms to IEEE Std 488.1¾1987. Attach an
IEEE Std 488.1¾1987 GPIB cable to this connector and to your controller as
shown in the following figure.
If necessary, the GPIB connectors can be stacked as shown in the figure below.
Setting the GPIB Address
To function correctly, your instrument must have a unique device address. The
default settings for the GPIB configuration are:
GPIB Address 1
GPIB ModeGPIB Talk/Listen
To change either of the GPIB settings, do the following:
1. Select GPIB Configuration¼ from the Utilities menu.
2. Click the Configuration Talk/Listen button.
3. Change the GPIB Address to a unique address.
4. Click the Close button.
The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller.
1-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Getting Started
Documentation
DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User Manual. The
user manual has information about installing and operating the instrument.
It also provides concepts and theories about using the instrument..
Getting Started with OpenChoice ™ Solutions Manual. A book that
explores some options for getting data from your instrument into any one
of several available analysis tools.
DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Specifications and
Performance Verification. Instrument specifications and a performance
verification procedure is available as a printable PDF file on the DPO4000
Series Product Software CD-ROM.
TekVISA Programmer Manual. This manual is available as a printable
PDF file on the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD-ROM. The manual
describes TekVISA, the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application
Programming Interface (API). TekVISA is industry-compliant software
for writing interoperable instrument drivers in a variety of Application
Development Environments (ADEs).
DPO4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual. A
printed service manual is available as an optional accessory. The service
manual includes procedures to service the instrument to module levels.
This manual is also available as a printable PDF file on the DPO4000
Series Product Software CD-ROM.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
1-3
Getting Started
1-4
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the
GPIB interface using commands and queries. The related topics listed below
describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The topics also describe the
conventions that the instrument uses to process them. See the Command Groups
topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group, or
use the index to locate a specific command.
Backus-Naur Form
Notation
This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus-Naur
Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used.
Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form
Symbol
<>
Meaning
::=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
Defined element
{}
Group; one element is required
[]
.. .
Optional; can be omitted
()
Comment
Previous element(s) may be repeated
Command and Query Structure
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually called
commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the
instrument to perform a specific action. Queries cause the instrument to return
data and status information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command differs from the set form by its question mark on the end. For example,
the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all
commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set only and
some have query only.
Messages
A command message is a command or query name followed by any information
the instrument needs to execute the command or query. Command messages may
contain five element types, defined in the following table.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-1
Command Syntax
Table 2-2: Command Message Elements
Commands
Symbol
Meaning
<Header>
This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon
(:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands,
the beginning colon is required. Never use the beginning colon with
command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
This is a header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a colon (:)
character always separates them from each other.
<Argument>
This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header.
Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple
arguments. A <space> separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each other.
<Comma>
A single comma is used between arguments of multiple–argument
commands. Optionally, there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space>
A white space character is used between a command header and the
related argument. Optionally, a white space may consist of multiple
white space characters.
Commands cause the instrument to perform a specific function or change one of
the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma> <Argument>]...]
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical
or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.
2-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
Queries
Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information. Queries
have the structure:
[:]<Header>
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument> [<Coma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics
below the specified branch or level. For example, HIStogram:STATistics:STDdev?
returns the standard deviation of the histogram, while HIStogram:STATistics?
returns all the histogram statistics, and HIStogram? returns all the histogram
parameters.
Headers
You can control whether the instrument returns headers as part of the query
response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature. If header is on,
the query response returns command headers, then formats itself as a valid set
command. When header is off, the response includes only the values. This may
make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response. The table
below shows the difference in responses.
Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses
Query
Header Off
Header On
TIME?
”14:30:00
:TIME”14:30:00
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
100
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100
Clearing the Instrument
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument to accept a new
command or query by using the selected Device Clear (DCL) GPIB function.
Refer to your GPIB library documentation for further details about the selected
Device Clear operation.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-3
Command Syntax
Command Entry
The following rules apply when entering commands:
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through
09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination of white
space characters and line feeds.
Abbreviating
You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command in this
documentation shows the abbreviations in capitals. For example, you can enter
the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.
Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument models are
introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part
of query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length with the VERBose command.
Concatenating
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The instrument executes concatenated commands in the order
received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning
colon on all commands except the first one. For example, the commands
TRIGger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10, can be concatenated
into the following single command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic,
you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon.
For example, you can concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope
and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 10
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC
2-4
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not
there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 10 will
set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for
averaging to 10.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are
concatenated into a single response message. For example, if the display
imageview color is temperature and the display recordview color is spectral,
the concatenated query DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW?;
RECORDVIEW? will return the following.
If the header is on:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE;
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW SPECTRAL
If the header is off:
TEMPERATURE;SPECTRAL
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For
example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then
queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state.
Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 (no colon before
ACQuire)
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1;:CURSor2 5 (extra colon before CURSor2;
use DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1:CURSor2 5 instead)
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;:*OPC (colon before a star (*) command)
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1;COLor:CURSor2 5 (levels of the mnemonics
are different; either remove the second use of COLor or place :DISPlay: in
front of COLor:CURSor2 5)
Terminating
This documentation uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message
terminator.
Table 2-4: End of Message Terminator
Symbol
Meaning
<EOM>
Message terminator
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-5
Command Syntax
The end-of-message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted
concurrently with the last data byte). The last data byte may be an ASCII linefeed
(LF) character.
This instrument does not support ASCII LF only message termination. The
instrument always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI.
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a
channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4. You use these mnemonics
in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a
CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition command. In the
command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.
Cursor Position
Mnemonics
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to
use.
Table 2-5: Cursor Mnemonics
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CURSOR<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
POSITION<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
HPOS<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in
the header.
Table 2-6: Math Specifier Mnemonics
Measurement Specifier
Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
Math<x>
A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4.
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the
header. Up to eight automated measurements may be displayed.
Table 2-7: Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Channel Mnemonics
2-6
Symbol
Meaning
MEAS<x>
A measurement specifier; <x> is 1 through 8.
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
Table 2-8: Channel Mnemonics
Reference Waveform
Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CH<x>
A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 4.
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
header.
Table 2-9: Reference Waveform Nmemonics
Symbol
Meaning
REF<x>
A reference waveform specifier; <x> is 1 thru 4.
Argument Types
Numeric
Many instrument commands require numeric arguments. The syntax shows the
format that the instrument returns in response to a query. This is also the preferred
format when sending the command to the instrument though any of the formats
will be accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as follows:
Table 2-10: Numeric Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
<bin>
Digital data in binary format
<hex>
Digital data in hexadecimal format
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, either by
rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted
in the command description.
Quoted String
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (’) or double quote
("). The following is an example of a quoted string: "This is a quoted
string". This documentation represents these arguments as follows:
Table 2-11: Quoted String Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<QString>
Quoted string of ASCII text
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-7
Command Syntax
A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character
set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string. For
example: "this is a valid string".
2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the
previous rule. For example, "this is an ’acceptable’ string".
3. You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote. For
example: "here is a "" mark".
4. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the
END message before the closing delimiter.
6. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string, but is treated as just another character in the string.
7. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
"Invalid string argument’ (quotes are not of the same type)
"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)
Block
Several instrument commands use a block argument form (see the following table).
Table 2-12: Block Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar>
A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF (0
through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes defined as: <Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...] |#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together,
the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how
many <DChar> elements follow.
2-8
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Syntax
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-9
Command Syntax
2-10
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
The DP04000 Series GPIB and RS-232 interfaces conform to Tektronix standard
codes and formats except where noted. The GPIB interface also conforms to IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 except where noted.
Acquisition Command Group
Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and
functions that control how the instrument acquires the signals you input to the
channels and processes them into waveforms.
Using these commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the following:
Start and stop acquisitions.
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired, averaged, or enveloped
over successive acquisitions of that waveform.
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
Determine the action the system takes upon completing an acquisition, such
as saving all waveforms and taking a measurement when the acquisition is
stopped.
Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms.
Set acquisition parameters.
Table 2-13: Acquisition Commands
Command
Description
ACQuire?
Sets or returns acquisition mode
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?
Returns the maximum real-time sample rate
ACQuire:MODe
Returns the number of acquisitions that have
occurred
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Sets or returns number of acquisitions for an
averaged waveform
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets or returns number of acquisitions for
envelope waveform
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Sets or returns the number of samples that
make up a WfmDB for single sequence
mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test
ACQuire:STATE
Sets or returns whether the acquisition is
continuous or single sequence
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Returns acquisition parameters
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-11
Command Groups
Table 2-13: Acquisition Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
FASTAcq?
Enables, disables, or returns state of Fast
Acquisition mode
FASTAcq:STATE
Returns the Fast Acquisition state
Alias Command Group
Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a sequence of standard
commands. You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands
to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute
parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism obeys the following rules:
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488.2 message unit, which may
not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma, or a command or query
program header.
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by program date, a
colon, comma, or question mark.
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form.
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of
the alias deletion functions.
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.
Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered
DPO4000 series errors unless specifically noted in the command description
in this document.
Table 2-14: Alias Commands
2-12
Command
Description
ALIas
Sets or returns the alias state
ALIas:CATalog?
Returns a list of the currently defined alias
labels
ALIas:DEFine
Assigns a sequence of program messages
to an alias label
ALIas:DELEte
Removes a specified alias
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Deletes all existing aliases
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-14: Alias Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
Removes a specified alias
ALIas[:STATE]
Sets or returns the alias state
Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group
The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current
state of instrument calibration and allow you to initiate internal signal path
calibration (SPC) or execute diagnostic tests. Commands that are specific to
factory calibration are not described in this manual; however, they are described
in the service manual (located on your DPO4000 Documentation CD-ROM in
PDF format). You can also order a printed copy.
Table 2-15: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands
Command
Description
*CAL?
Instructs the instrument to perform
self-calibration
CAL?
Returns the internal and factory calibration
status and the calibration due date
CALibrate:FACtory
Starts and stops the factory calibration
process
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?
Queries if calibration is due
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs
Sets or returns hours when calibration is due
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs
Sets or returns the number of years when
calibration is due
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?
Returns the factory calibration status value
saved in nonvolatile memory
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTAtus?
Returns information to synchronize
programmed factory calibration steps
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus?
Returns information about an input signal
required for calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal
Starts the internal signal path calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Starts the internal signal path calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Returns the current status of the internal
siganl path calibration.
CALibrate:RESults?
Returns the status of all calibration
subsystems without performing an SPC
operation
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Returns the results of the last SPC operation
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?
Returns the status of internal and factory
calibration
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-13
Command Groups
Table 2-15: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Frequency?
Returns the status of internal and factory
frequency calibration
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Trigger?
Returns the status of internal and factory
trigger calibration
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Voltage?
Returns the status of internal and factory
voltage calibration
CALibrate:TEMPerature?
Returns the temperature during the last
signal path compensation operation
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion
Sets the diagnostic loop option
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
Sets the diagnostic loop option to run N times
DIAg:LOOP:STOP
Stops diagnostic at the end of the current
loop
DIAg:MODe
Select the test suite of diagnostics that is to
be run
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Returns the pass/fail status from the last
diagnostic test sequence execution
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Returns the internal results log from the last
diagnostic test sequence execution
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Selects all available diagnostics
DIAg:SELect:<function>
Selects one of the available diagnostic areas
DIAg:STATE
Sets the instrument operating state
Cursor Command Group
Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display
and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor 1 and
cursor 2, such as waveform source, cursor position, and cursor color.
2-14
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions:
Off Shuts off the display of all cursors.
Vertical Bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide traditional
horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), the delta between
them, and 1/delta (results in frequency when the horizontal unit is time).
Horizontal Bars. Displays horizontal bar cursors, which provide traditional
vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), and the delta
between them.
Waveform Cursors. Consists of two cursors you can independently assign to
a waveform. These cursors provide the same readouts that the vertical and
horizontal bar cursors provide. Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently
measure waveform amplitude and time. In XY or XYZ format, waveform
cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage,
where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Screen Cursors. Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical
cursors. You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within
the waveform display area. Screen cursors, depending on the style selected,
consist of the intersection of a vertical and horizontal line, an X, or a vertical
line with an X. These cursors have no association with any waveform, other
than they inherit the color of the waveform they are assigned too.
Table 2-16: Cursor Commands
Command
Description
CURSor?
Returns all cursor settings
CURSor:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the cursor type
CURSor:HBArs?
Returns hbar cursor settings
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns hbars cursors vertical difference
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the hbar cursor<x> vertical
position
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
Returns hbar cursor units
CURSor:HBArs:USE
Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement
scale
CURSor:MODe
Sets or returns whether cursors move in
unison or separately
CURSor:VBArs?
Sets or returns the position of vertical bar
cursors
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns the difference between vbar cursors
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Returns the horizontal value of the specified
vertical bar ticks
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the vbar cursor<x> horizontal
position
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-15
Command Groups
Table 2-16: Cursor Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
CURSor:VBArs:USE
Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement
scale
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
Returns the vertical difference between the
two vertical bar cursor ticks
Display Command Group
Use the commands in the Display command group to change the graticule style,
the displayed intensities, and to set the characteristics of the waveform display.
You can set the display of date and time; cursor, histogram, mask, and
measurement readouts; measurement annotations, and the mode in which
waveforms are displayed.
There are six color palettes from which you can select:
Normal displays hues and lightness levels for best overall viewing.
Temp displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample density in
warmer colors (red shades) while the areas of lowest sample density appear in
cooler colors (blue shades).
Spectral displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample density in
blue shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in red shades.
Green displays waveforms in shades of green. Areas of the waveform with
the highest sample density appear in lighter green shades while the areas of
lowest sample density appear in darker green shades.
Gray displays waveforms in shades of gray. Areas of the waveform with the
highest sample density appear in lighter gray shades while the areas of lowest
sample density appear in darker gray shades.
User allows you to create a customized color palette.
Use the commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms and graticule
display properties. Note that the mode you choose globally affects all displayed
waveforms.
Table 2-17: Display Commands
2-16
Command
Description
DISplay?
Returns current display settings
DISplay:CLOCk
Sets or returns the display of the date/time
stamp
DISplay:FORMat
Sets or returns the display format
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-17: Display Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
DISplay:GRAticule
Sets or returns the type of graticule that is
displayed
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Returns all display intensity settings
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the
display
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule
Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the
display
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms
DISplay:PERSistence
Sets or returns display persistence setting
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast
Sets or returns the video picture mode
autocontrast setting
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness
Sets or returns the video picture mode
brightness setting
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst
Sets or returns the video picture mode
contrast setting
DISplay:PICture:STATE
Sets or returns the video picture mode setting
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly
Sets a dots-only display
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE
Sets or returns the video vectorscope state
setting
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe
Sets or returns the video vectorscope display
type setting
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting
DISplay:XY:MODe
Sets or returns the display mode
DISplay:XY:YCHannel
Specifies the Y channel to be displayed
against a channel waveform
DISplay:XY:YREF
Specifies the Y channel to be displayed
against a reference waveform
MESSage:BOX
Defines the size and position of the message
window
MESSage:CLEAR
Removes the message text from the
message window
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-17
Command Groups
Table 2-17: Display Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
MESSage:SHOW
Clears the contents of the message window
and displays the new message in the window
MESSage:STATE
Controls the display of the message window
Ethernet Command Group
Use the commands in the Ethernet Command group to set up the Ethernet remote
interface.
Table 2-18: Ethernet Commands
Command
Description
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
Sets or returns the network initialization
search for a DHCP/BOOTP server
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
Sets or returns the network Domain Name
Server (DNS) IP address
ETHERnet:DOMAINname
Sets or returns the network domain name
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?
Returns the Ethernet address value assigned
to the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
Sets or returns the remote interface gateway
IP address
ETHERnet:HTTPPort
Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP
port value
ETHERnet:IPADDress
Sets or returns the IP address assigned to
the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:NAME
Sets or returns the network name assigned
to the oscilloscope
ETHERnet:PASSWord
This command sets or returns the Ethernet
access password
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
Sets or returns the remote interface subnet
mask value
File System Command Group
Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use the
built-in hard disk drive and floppy disk drive. You can use the commands to
do the following:
List the contents of the default directory
Create and delete directories
Create, copy, read, rename, or delete a file
2-18
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
"C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET"
File names follow the MSDOS format: [DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
Path separators may be either forward slashes (/) or back slashes (\)
NOTE. Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected
results, depending on how your GPIB controller application treats escaped
characters. Many applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed by
an alphabetic character as an escaped character, and, as such, interpret that
alphabetic character as a control character. For example, the sequence "\n" may
be interpreted as a newline character; "\t" may be interpreted as a tab character.
To ensure that this interpretation does not occur, you can use double back slashes.
For example, "C:\\testfile.txt".
Some FILESystem commands may fail because a file has read-only attributes.
You will not be able to delete or replace such files until this attribute is
removed..
Table 2-19: File System Commands
Command
Description
FILESystem?
Returns the file system state
FILESystem:COPy
Copies one or more files to a new file
FILESystem:CWD
Sets or returns the current working directory
for FILESystem GPIB commands.
FILESystem:DELEte
Deletes a named file or directory
FILESystem:DIR?
Returns a list of directory contents
FILESystem:FREESpace?
Returns the number of bytes of free space
on the current drive
FILESystem:MKDir
Makes a new directory
FILESystem:REName
Assigns a new name to an existing file
FILESystem:RMDir
Deletes the named directory
Hard Copy Command Group
Hard copy commands enable you to make hard copies.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-19
Command Groups
Table 2-20: Hard Copy Commands
Command
Description
HARDCopy
Sends a screen copy to the selected port or
returns the selected port and file path
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter
Sets or returns the currently active printer
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Changes hard copy output to print color
traces and graticule on a white background
HARDCopy:LAYout
Sets or returns the page orientation for hard
copy
HARDCopy:PREVIEW
Previews the current screen contents with
the InkSaver palette applied
HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD
Adds a network printer to the list of available
printers
HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete
Removes a network printer from the list of
available printers
HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST?
Returns the list of currently attached printers
HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName
Renames a network printer on the list of
available printers
Horizontal Command Group
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the instrument. You can set the
time per division (or time per point) of the main time base. You · can use the
Horizontal commands to do the following:
Set the scale, horizontal position and reference, and units of the time base
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last point, or get all
the horizontal settings
Enable or disable the display of the time base
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This provides
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments.
Table 2-21: Horizontal Commands
2-20
Command
Description
HORizontal?
Returns all learnable settings for the
horizontal commands
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
Returns the record length
HORizontal:MAIn?
Returns the time per division of the time base
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Sets or returns the main time base trigger
delay mode
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe
Sets or returns the time base trigger delay
mode
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-21: Horizontal Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the main time base trigger
delay time
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition?
Sets or returns the waveform horizontal
position on the display
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
Sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired
number of samples per second
Or returns the current horizontal sample rate
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
Sets time per division for the main time base
Or returns the main time base horizontal
scale
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Sets time per division for the main time base
Or returns the main time base horizontal
scale
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
Returns the units for the horizontal main time
base
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
Sets or returns the units string for the
horizontal main time base
HORizontal:PREViewstate?
Returns whether or not the acquisition
system is in the preview state
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Sets the horizontal record length to the
number of data points in each frame
Or returns the current horizontal record
length
HORizontal:RESOlution
Sets the horizontal record length to the
number of data points in each frame and
simultaneously adjusts the sample rate to
maintain a constant time/division
Or returns the current horizontal record
length
HORizontal:ROLL?
Returns the horizontal roll mode status
Mark Command Group
The Mark commands provide...
Mark Commands
Command
Description
MARK
Move to the next or previous mark on the
waveform.
MARK:CREATE
Creates a mark on a particular waveform or
all waveforms in a column.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-21
Command Groups
Mark Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
MARK:DELEte
Deletes a mark on a particular waveform, all
waveforms in a column, or all marks.
MARK:FREE?
Returns how many marks are free to be used
MARK:SELected:END?
Returns the end of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?
Returns the focus of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?
Returns how many marks are in the current
zoom pixel column.
MARK:SELected:OWNer?
Returns the owner of the selected mark.
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?
Returns the source waveform of the selected
mark.
MARK:SELected:STARt?
Returns the start of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
MARK:SELected:STATe?
Returns the on or off state of the selected
mark.
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?
Returns the position of the selected mark, in
terms of 0 to 100% of the upper window.
MARK:TOTal?
Returns how many marks are used.
Math Command Group
Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define math
waveforms. You can define and display up to four math waveforms simultaneously
on four channel models and up to two on two channel models. Use the available
math functions to define your math waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression.
If you change these sources, the math waveforms you previously defined will be
affected.
Math expressions can be simple, containing no mathematical computation, such
as CH1, which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of channel 1.
Math expressions can also be complex, consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources, functions, and operands.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons: You can turn off
the channel, stop the waveform (via Run/Stop from the Horiz/Acq menu), or stop
the trigger (via Run/Stop from the Trig menu). When you turn off the channel,
math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed. When you stop either the
waveform or the trigger, the math calculation stops, and the last math calculation
performed is displayed.
2-22
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered, math waveforms
containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes.
Also, sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to
update math waveforms.
Table 2-22: Math Commands
Command
Description
MATH[1]:DEFIne
Sets or returns the math<x> waveform
definition for the specified waveform
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the math horizontal display
position math waveforms
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the math horizontal display
scale for math waveforms
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs
Sets or returns the math waveform horizontal
measurement unit value
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG
Sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag
function in the specified math string
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow
Sets or returns the window function used
to multiply the input data to the spectral
analyzer
MATH[1]:TYPe
Sets or returns the math waveform mode
type
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the math waveform vertical
position
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the math waveform vertical
scale (per div)
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs
Sets or returns the units used for the math
waveform; command overrides the default
unit string
MATHVAR?
Returns all numerical values used within
math expressions
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
Sets or returns numerical values you can use
within math expressions
Measurement Command Group
Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated
measurement system.
Up to eight automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the
commands, these measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> can be
1 through 8.
In addition to the eight displayed measurements, the measurement commands let
you specify an additional measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-23
Command Groups
has no front-panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never displayed.
Because they are computed only when needed, immediate measurements slow the
waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, use the VALue query to
obtain measurement results.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You
can assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each
measurement. Other parameters, such as reference levels, have only one value,
which applies to all measurements.
Table 2-23: Measurement Commands
2-24
Command
Description
MEASUrement?
Returns all measurement parameters
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Removes the measurement snapshot display
MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or returns the measurement gating
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Returns all immediate measurement setup
parameters
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Returns information about the immediate
delay measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Sets or returns the search direction to use for
immediate delay measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for
immediate delay “from” and “to” waveform
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE
Sets or returns the “from” source for all single
channel immediate measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Sets or returns the source to measure “to” for
phase or delay immediate measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Returns the units of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Returns the value of the immediate
measurement
MEASUrement:INDICators?
Returns all measurement indicator
parameters
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?
Returns the position of the specified
horizontal measurement indicator
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?
Returns the number of horizontal
measurement indicators currently being
displayed
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?
Returns the number of vertical measurement
indicators currently being displayed
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-23: Measurement Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE
Set or returns the state of visible
measurement indicators
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?
Returns the value of the specified vertical
measurement indicator
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
This query-only command returns all
measurement parameters
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Returns the number of values accumulated
since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Returns the delay measurement parameters
for specified measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
Sets or returns the search direction to use for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge to
use for delay “from” and “to” waveform
measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Returns the maximum value found since the
last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Returns the mean value accumulated since
the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Returns the minimum value found since the
last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Sets or returns the channel from which
measurements are taken
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Sets or returns the channel to which
measurements are sent
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Sets or returns whether the specified
measurement slot is computed and
displayed
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Returns the standard deviation of values
accumulated since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the measurement<x> type
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Returns measurement<x> units
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Returns the value of measurement<x>
MEASUrement:METHod
Sets or returns the method used for
calculating reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Returns the current reference level
parameters
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference level for
rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference level for
rise time
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-25
Command Groups
Table 2-23: Measurement Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference level for
delay "to" measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Sets or returns the method for assigning high
and low reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference percent
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference percent
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
Sets or returns the mid reference percent
level for waveform measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference percent
level for second waveform measurements
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Displays the measurement snapshot list
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
Turns management statistics on or off and
sets or returns which pair of statistical
accumulations is displayed
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Sets or returns the ’time constant’ for
mean and standard deviation statistical
accumulations
Miscellaneous Command Group
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987 devices on the
GPIB bus. The 488.2-1987 standard defines these commands. The common
commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Table 2-24: Miscellaneous Commands
2-26
Command
Description
AUTOSet
Sets the vertical, horizontal and trigger
controls to provide a stable display of the
selected waveform
AUXout?
Returns the auxiliary out setup
AUXout:EDGE
Sets or returns the polarity of the auxiliary
output
AUXout:SOUrce
Sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC
connection
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Miscellaneous Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
BELl
In previous models, this command sounded
the audio indicator. Provided for backward
compatibility.
CLEARMenu
Clears the current menu from the display
DATE
Sets or returns the date that the instrument
can display
*DDT
Sets or returns the commands that will be
executed by the group execute trigger
FPANEL:PRESS
Duplicates the action of pressing a specified
front-panel button
FPANEL:TURN
Duplicates the action of turning a specified
front-panel control knob
GPIBUsb:ADDress?
Returns the GPIB/USB address.
GPIBUsb:HWVersion
Sets or returns the GPIB/USB hardware
version.
GPIBUsb:ID?
Sets or returns the GPIB/USB ID.
GPIBUsb:SETADDress
GPIBUsb:SETID
GPIBUsb:STATUS
HDR
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable
State
HEADer
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable
State
ID?
Returns identifying information about the
instrument and its firmware
*IDN?
Returns the instrument identification code
LANGuage
Sets or returns the user interface display
languag
LANGuage:INCRement
Changes the oscilloscope display language
to the next language in the sequence
LOCk
Sets or returns the front panel lock state
*LRN?
Returns a listing of instrument settings
NEWpass
Changes the password for user protected
data
REM
Specifies a comment, which is ignored by
the instrument
SET?
Returns a listing of instrument settings
STArtuptime?
Returns the time that the oscilloscope was
last powered on
TEKSecure
Initializes both waveform and setup
memories
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-27
Command Groups
Table 2-24: Miscellaneous Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
TIME
Sets or returns the time displayed by the
instrument
TOTaluptime?
Returns the total number of hours that the
oscilloscope has been turned on since the
nonvolatile memory was last programmed
*TRG
Performs the group execute trigger (GET)
*TST?
Tests the GPIB interface and returns status
UNLock
Unlocks front panel
VERBose
Sets or returns the verbose state
Save and Recall Command Group
Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve
internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup, you save all the settings
of the instrument. When you recall a setup, the instrument restores itself to the
state that it was in when you originally saved that setting.
Table 2-25: Save and Recall Commands
2-28
Command
Description
FACtory
Resets the instrument to factory default
settings
*RCL
Restores the state of the instrument from a
copy of the setting stored in memory
RECAll:SETUp
Recalls saved instrument settings
RECAll:WAVEform
Recalls a stored waveform to a reference
location
*SAV
Stores the state of the instrument to a
specified memory location
SAVe:IMAGe
Saves a capture of the screen image into the
specified file
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the format for images
SAVe:SETUp
Saves the current front-panel setup to a
specified memory location or file
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-25: Save and Recall Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
SAVe:WAVEform
Saves a waveform to one of four reference
memory locations or a mass storage file
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the format for saved
waveforms
Search Command Group
The Search commands provide...
Search Commands
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy
Copies the search criteria to the trigger, or
the trigger criteria to the search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE
Sets the search state to on or off
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?
Returns the total amount of matches for this
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS
Sets or queries the serial search type
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or queries the search condition for CAN
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or queries the CAN search condition to
be valid on a READ, WRITE or either
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or queries the CAN data qualifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or queries the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string to be
used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or queries the CAN Frame Type to be
used
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or queries the CAN addressing mode to
standard or extended format
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
sets or queries the binary address string to
be used for CAN search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7
or 10-Bit
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or queries the I2C address type to I2C
special addresses
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or queries the binary address string to
be used for I2C search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-29
Command Groups
Search Commands, (cont.)
2-30
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or queries the search condition for I2C
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or queries the I2C search condition to
be valid on a READ, WRITE or either
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or queries the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for I2C search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string to be
used for I2C search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or queries the search condition for SPI
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string to be
used for SPI search if
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string to be
used for SPI search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or queries the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for SPI search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SOUrce
Sets or queries the bus for a serial search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for an edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for an
edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or queries the level for an edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
CH<x>
Sets or queries the level for edge search for
the selected channel
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
MATH
Sets or queries the math waveform level for
edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
REF<x>
Sets or queries the reference waveform level
for edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FUNCtion
Sets or queries the logic operator for the
logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CH<x>
Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or queries whether the clock edge is
rise or fall for a logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or queries the clock source definition
for logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:MATH
Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:REF<x>
Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Search Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
Sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:MATH
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for
the logic search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating a
logic pattern search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum time that the
selected pattern may be true
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum time that the
selected pattern may be true
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel threshold level
for an edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform threshold
level for edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform
threshold level for edge search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel waveform lower
threshold level for a transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform lower
threshold level for a transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform lower
threshold level for a transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source waveform for a
pulse search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating
a pulse width search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a
pulse width search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WHEn
sets or returns the condition setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for a runt
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a
setup/hold search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-31
Command Groups
Search Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data threshold setting for
an setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time setting for an
setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time setting for an
setup/hold search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
Sets or returns the transition time setting for
an transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition setting for an
transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a
search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the channel waveform upper
threshold level for a transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:MATH
Sets or returns the math waveform upper
threshold level for a transition search
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:REF<x>
Sets or returns the reference waveform
upper threshold level for a transition search
Status and Error Command Group
Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to determine the
status of the instrument and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to all
devices on the GPIB bus. The IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these commands and
queries. The common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.
2-32
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-26: Status and Error Commands
Command
Description
ALLEv?
Returns all events and their messages
BUSY?
Returns instrument status
*CLS
Clears status
DESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event
Status Enable Register
*ESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status
Enable Register
*ESR?
Returns the contents of the Standard Event
Status Register
EVENT?
Returns event code from the event queue
EVMsg?
Returns event code, message from the event
queue
EVQty?
Return number of events in the event queue
*OPC
Generates the operation complete message
in the standard event status register when all
pending operations are finished
Or returns "1" when all current operations
are finished
*OPT?
Returns a list of options installed in the
instrument
*PSC
Sets or returns the power on status flag
*PUD
Sets or returns a string of protected user data
*RST
Resets the instrument to factory default
settings
*SRE
Sets or returns the bits in the Service
Request Enable Register
*STB?
Returns the contents of the Status Byte
Register
*WAI
Prevents the instrument from executing
further commands until all pending
operations finish
Trigger Command Group
Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of
triggering for the instrument.
There are two triggers: A and B. Where appropriate, the command set has parallel
constructions for each trigger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-33
Command Groups
You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you display
a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level
of your choosing.
You can also set A triggers to pulse, logic or video modes. With pulse triggering,
the instrument triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height.
Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or more channels.
The instrument then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels.
Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition,
High Definition, and custom video standards. You can trigger on all fields, all
lines, or individual video lines.
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands
2-34
Command
Description
BUS?
Returns the parameters for each bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe
Sets or returns the probing method used to
probe the CAN bus
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
Sets or returns the sample point (in %) to
sample during each bit period
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
Sets or returns the CAN data source
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt
Sets the display format for the numerical
information in the bus waveform
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe
Sets the display type for the bus
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the I2C SDATA source
BUS:B<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the position of the bus
waveforms
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MISO source
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity
Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the SPI SS source
BUS:B<x>:STATE
Turns the bus on and off
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
Sets or returns the bus type
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the threshold for a channel
TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to occur
TRIGger:A
Sets A trigger level to 50% or returns current
A trigger parameters
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:BUS
Sets or queries the serial trigger type
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
Sets or returns the CAN condition
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
Sets or queries the CAN trigger condition to
be valid on a READ, WRITE, or either
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
Sets or queries the CAN trigger frame type
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe
Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue
Sets or queries the binary address string
used for the CAN trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
Sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7
or 10-bit
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
Sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C
special addresses
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
Sets or queries the binary address string
used for the I2C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
Sets or returns the trigger condition for I2C
trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
Sets or queries the I2C trigger condition valid
on a READ, WRITE, or either
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for I2C trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string used
for I2C triggering
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
Sets or queries the trigger condition for SPI
triggering
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:
VALue
Sets or returns the binary data string to be
used for SPI trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:
MOSI}:VALue
Sets or queries the binary data string used
for the SPI trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
Sets or returns the length of the data string
in bytes to be used for SPI trigger
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
Sets or queries the bus for a serial search
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Returns the source, coupling and source for
the A edge trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A
edge trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-35
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
2-36
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for the A edge
trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A edge
trigger
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for the A trigger
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
Specifies or returns the input settings for the
specified trigger channel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Returns all A trigger logic settings
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of A trigger logic
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logical combination of the
input channels for the A logic trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Returns the A logic trigger input for channels
1-3.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Specifies or returns the input settings for the
specified logic trigger channel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets the polarity of the clock channel.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the channel to use as the
clock source
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Returns the conditions for generating an A
logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for
channel 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for
channel 4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition for generating
the A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum time that
the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum time that
the selected pattern may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold?
Returns clock edge polarity, voltage threshold
and source; data voltage threshold and
source; and setup/hold times for violation
triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Returns clock edge polarity, voltage threshold
and source input for setup/hold triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for
setup and hold triggering
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source for the A
logic trigger setup and hold input
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:
THReshold
Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold
for setup and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?
Returns the voltage threshold and data
source for the setup/hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source for the setup
and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:
THReshold
Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for
setup and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time for the setup
and hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time for setup and
hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Returns the threshold voltage for all channels
in A logic trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the A logic trigger threshold
voltage for the specified channel
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the lower
threshold for the channel selected
TRIGger:A:MODe
Sets or returns the A trigger mode
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Returns the A pulse trigger parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of pulse on which
to trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT?
Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic
parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:HIGHLimit
Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOWLimit
Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A pulse
trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Returns the upper and lower thresholds for
the A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the type of pulse width the
trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-37
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
2-38
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the minimum width for A
pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?
Returns the delta time, polarity, and both
upper and lower threshold limits for the
transition time trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
DELTatime
Sets or returns the delta time used in
calculating the transition value
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
HIGHLimit
Sets or returns the upper transition trigger
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
LOWLimit
Sets or returns the lower transition trigger
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
transition trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for transition
trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold?
Returns the upper and lower thresholds for
the transition trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:HIGH
Sets or returns the upper transition trigger
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:LOW
Sets or returns the lower transition trigger
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
WHEn
Sets or returns the relationship of delta time
to transitioning signal
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?
Returns the trigger A pulse width parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LEVel
Sets or returns the threshold for the pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the pulse width
trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Sets or returns the criteria for width
specification of pulse width trigger events
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the pulse width
trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
Sets or returns the criteria for width
specification of pulse width trigger events
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse
width trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the A pulse
trigger
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the type of pulse width the
trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the minimum width for A
pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for
setup and hold triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock source for the A
logic trigger setup and hold input
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold
for setup and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data source for the setup
and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for
setup and hold trigger
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time for the setup
and hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup time for setup and
hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
DELTatime
Sets or returns the delta time used in
calculating the transition value
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse
transition trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for transition
trigger
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
Sets or returns the relationship of delta time
to transitioning signal
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or queries the type of A trigger
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets the upper threshold for the channel
selected
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Returns the video parameters for the A
trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
Returns the custom video parameters for the
A trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-39
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
2-40
Command
Description
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:
TYPE}
Sets or queries the video trigger format
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
Sets or returns the video scan rate
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat
Sets or queries the analog HDTV video
signal format
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD
Sets or returns the trigger holdoff in video
field units
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Sets or returns the trigger delay as a number
of video lines
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity of the video
trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Sets or returns the polarity of the video
trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Sets or returns the video standard
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
Sets or returns the video field trigger
TRIGger:B
Sets the B trigger level to 50% or returns the
B trigger parameters
TRIGger:B:BY
Sets or returns B trigger time or event
qualifiers
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Returns B trigger edge type parameters
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type of B trigger coupling
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the B edge trigger slope
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the B edge trigger source
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Returns the current B trigger events
parameter
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Sets or returns the number of events that
must occur before the B trigger occurs
TRIGger:B:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for the B trigger
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x>
Sets or returns the level for the B trigger for
a specific channel
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold
for the channel selected
TRIGger:B:STATE
Returns the current state of the B trigger
TRIGger:B:TIMe
Sets or returns the B trigger delay time
TRIGger:B:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of B trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-27: Trigger Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the B trigger upper threshold
for the channel selected
TRIGger:STATE?
Returns the current state of the triggering
system
Vertical Command Group
Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of
all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel,
reference, and math waveforms.
You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments.
Table 2-28: Vertical Commands
Command
Description
CH<x>?
Returns vertical parameters for the specified
channel
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified
channel
CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or returns the coupling setting for the
specified channel
CH<x>:DESKew
Sets or returns the deskew time for the
specified channel
CH<x>:INVert
Sets or returns the invert function for the
specified channel
CH<x>:OFFSet
Sets or returns the channel offset
CH<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the channel vertical position
CH<x>:PRObe?
Returns the gain, resistance, units, and ID
of the probe that is attached to the specified
channel
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero
Executes the probe auto-zero operation
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss
Executes a probe degauss operation
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
Returns the probe degauss state
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN
Returns the gain of the probe that is attached
to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Returns the type and serial number of
the probe that is attached to the specified
channel
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-41
Command Groups
Table 2-28: Vertical Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Returns the serial number of the probe that
is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
Returns the type of probe that is attached to
the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Returns the resistance of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Returns the units of the probe that is attached
to the specified channel
CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the
specified channel
CH<x>:TERmination
Sets channel input termination
CH<x>:YUNits
Sets or returns vertical units
Returns digital channel parameters
Sets or returns the digital channel vertical
position
Sets or returns the threshold for the digital
channel
2-42
REF<x>:DATE?
Returns the date that a reference waveform
was stored
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position of the
specified reference waveform in percent of
the waveform that is displayed to the right of
the center vertical graticule
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a
reference waveform
REF<x>:TIMe?
Returns the time that a reference waveform
was stored
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
specified reference waveform
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the reference waveform
vertical scale in vertical units/div
SELect?
Returns information on which waveforms are
on or off and which waveform is selected.
SELect:BUS<x>
Turns on the specified bus waveform
Or returns whether the specified bus channel
is on or off
SELect:CH<x>
Turns on the specified waveform
Or returns whether the specified channel is
on or off
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-28: Vertical Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
Turns on the specified digital waveform
Or returns whether the specified digital
channel is on or off
SELect:CONTROl
Sets or returns the waveform controlled by
the front panel
SELect:MATH[1]
Turns on the math waveform
Or returns whether the math waveform is on
or off
SELect:REF<x>
Turns on the specified reference waveform
Or returns whether the specified reference
waveform is on or off
Waveform Transfer Command Group
Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer
waveform data points to and from the instrument. Waveform data points are a
collection of values that define a waveform. One data value usually represents
one data point in the waveform record. When working with envelope waveforms,
each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min/max pair.
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data format, record
length, and waveform source.
Data Formats
Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each data point.
The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode specified when you
acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses eight bits
per waveform data point. Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up to 14 bits
per point.
The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format.
You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command. The instrument uses
signed, 4 byte integers and floating point values; it does not support unsigned
floating point values.
ASCII Data. ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values.
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,
-109,-107,-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output than binary.
However, ASCII may require more bytes to send the same values than it does with
binary. This may reduce transmission speeds.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-43
Command Groups
Binary Data. Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating point
values. The range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the
byte width is one, signed integer data ranges from -128 to 127, and positive
integer values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range
from -32768 to 32767. When a MATH (or REF that came with a MATH) is used,
32 bit floating point values are used that are four bytes in width.
The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are transferred.
The following are the four binary formats:
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
RFBinary specifies floating point data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
Waveform Data and Record
Lengths
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a
portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record. You can use the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to specify the first and last data points
of the waveform record.
When transferring data into the instrument, you must first specify the record length
of the destination waveform record. You do this with the WFMInopre:NR_Pt
command. Next, specify the first data point within the waveform record. For
example, when you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be stored starting
with the first point in the record. The instrument will ignore the value set by
DATa:STOP when reading in data. It will stop reading data when there is no more
data to read or when it has reached the specified record length.
When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify the first and last
data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to
the record length will always return the entire waveform.
Waveform Data Locations
and Memory Allocation
2-44
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a
waveform from the instrument. You can only transfer one waveform at a time.
Waveforms sent to the instrument are always stored in one of the four reference
memory locations. Use the DATa:DESTination command to specify a reference
memory location.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Waveform Preamble
Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble that
contains information such as the horizontal scale, the vertical scale, and other
settings in effect when the waveform was created. Refer to the individual
WFMInpre and WFMOutpre commands for more information.
Scaling Waveform Data
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data
points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform
preamble.
Transferring Waveform
Data from the Instrument
You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using
the following sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.
NOTE. MATH waveforms (and REF waveforms that came from a MATH) are
always set to four bytes.
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMOutpre.
6. Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe.
Transferring Waveform
Data to the Instrument
1. Specify waveform reference memory using DATa:DESTination.
2. Set WFMInpre:NR_Pt to equal the number of data points to be sent.
3. Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre:ENCdg.
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre:BYT_Nr.
5. Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre.
NOTE. FastAcq waveforms cannot be returned to the instrument via the CURVe
command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-45
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Waveform Transfer Commands
2-46
Command
Description
CURVe
The command format transfers waveform
data to the instrument (reference memory
location specified by DATa:DESTination)
The query format transfers waveform
data from instrument specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command
DATa
Sets the format and location of the waveform
data that is transferred with the CURVe
Command
Or returns the format and location of the
waveform data that is transferred with the
CURVe? command
DATa:DESTination
Sets or returns the reference memory
location for storing waveform data sent to
the instrument
DATa:ENCdg
Sets or returns the format of outgoing
waveform data
DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the location of waveform data
transferred from the instrument
DATa:STARt
Sets or returns the starting point in waveform
transfer
DATa:STOP
Sets or returns the ending data point in
waveform transfer
WAVFrm?
Returns a branch query containing waveform
data in either binary or ASCII format,
waveform formatting data, and the location
of the waveform data source
WFMInpre?
Returns the waveform formatting
specification to be applied to the next
incoming CURVE command data
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per binary
waveform point
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the binary field data width for
the first ordered waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
incoming waveform data
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Sets or returns the number of points in the
transmitted waveform record
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Waveform Transfer Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Sets or returns the point format of incoming
waveform data
WFMInpre:PT_Off
Sets or returns the trigger point within the
incoming waveform data
WFMInpre:WFId
Provided to allow a waveform extracted from
the instrument to be more easily sent back
WFMInpre:XINcr
Sets or returns the horizontal sampling
interval between incoming waveform points
WFMInpre:XUNit
Sets or returns the horizontal units of the
incoming waveform
WFMInpre:XZEro
Sets or returns the (sub-sample) time
between the trigger sample and the
occurrence of the actual incoming waveform
trigger
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Sets or returns the vertical scale factor, per
digitizing level, of the incoming waveform
points
WFMInpre:YOFf
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
incoming waveform in digitizing levels
WFMInpre:YUNit
Sets or returns the vertical units of the
incoming waveform
WFMInpre:YZEro
Sets or returns the offset of the incoming
waveform
WFMOutpre?
Returns the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATA:SOURCE
command
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per
waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the waveform
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the
waveform
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
outgoing waveforms
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Returns the number of points for the
waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Returns the point format for the waveform
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Returns the trigger point relative to
DATA:START for the waveform
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-47
Command Groups
Table 2-29: Waveform Transfer Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?
Returns whether the source waveform is
DPO
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Returns a string describing the acquisition
parameters for the waveform
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Returns the horizontal sampling interval
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Returns the horizontal units for the waveform
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Returns the (sub-sample) time between the
trigger sample and the occurrence of the
actual waveform trigger
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing
level for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels
for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Returns the vertical units for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Returns the vertical offset for the waveform
Zoom Command Group
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally
and vertically, without changing the time base or vertical settings.
You can specify up to four zoom areas. You can also specify a zoomed waveform
as a zoom source, which enables you to zoom in on a zoomed waveform.
Table 2-30: Zoom Commands
2-48
Command
Description
ZOOm?
Returns the current vertical and horizontal
positioning and scaling of the display
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE?
Sets or returns the size of the zoom graticule
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit?
Sets or returns the sizes of the acquisition
and zoom windows when Zoom is selected.
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
Sets or returns the zoom mode
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?
Sets or returns zoom factors for the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:FACtor?
Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom
box
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position
for the specified waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of
the specified waveform in the specified zoom
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Command Groups
Table 2-30: Zoom Commands, (cont.)
Command
Description
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position
for the specified waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of
the specified waveform in the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE
Specifies or returns a trace as zoomed, on
or off
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-49
Command Groups
2-50
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ACQuire? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the following current acquisition parameters:
Stop after
Acquisition state
Mode
Number of envelopes
Number of averages
Repetitive signals
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire?
Related Commands
Examples
ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq?, ACQuire:NUMAVg,
ACQuire:NUMEnv, ACQuire:STOPAfter
ACQUIRE? might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV
10;NUMAVG 16;NUMSAMPLES 16000;SAMPLINGMODE IT
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? (Query Only)
Returns the maximum real-time sample rate which varies from model to model.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?
Examples
ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE? might return 2.5e9 in a DPO4034 indicating the
maximum real-time sample rate is 2.5GS/s.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-51
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ACQuire:MODe
This command sets or returns the acquisition mode of the instrument.
This affects all live waveforms. This command is equivalent to selecting
Horizontal/Acquisition from the Horiz/Acq menu, and then choosing the desired
mode from the Acquisition Mode group box.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.
Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale
(time per division). The instrument sampling system always samples at the
maximum rate and so an acquisition interval may include more than one sample.
The acquisition mode (which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command)
determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the
many data samples.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:MODe {SAMple|PEAKdetect|HIRes|AVErage|ENVelope}
ACQuire:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMEnv, CURVe
SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value
that is taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all waveform data
has 8 bits of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the
lower-order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.
PEAKdetect specifies the display of high-low range of the samples taken from a
single waveform acquisition. The high-low range is displayed as a vertical column
that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition
interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.
HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the
average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval. This is a form
of averaging, where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition. The
number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of
data values that compose the average.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired
waveform, creating a running exponential average of the input signal. The number
of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or
queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
2-52
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ENVelope specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform shows the
PEAKdetect range of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions.
The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the envelope
waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv command.
Examples
ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that
is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:MODE? might return:ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE indicating that
the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform
acquisitions.
ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have
occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
This value is reset to zero when any acquisition, horizontal, or vertical arguments
that affect the waveform are changed. The maximum number of acquisitions
that can be counted is 230–1. The instrument stops counting when this number
is reached. This is the same value that displays in the upper center of the screen
when the acquisition system is stopped.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Related Commands
Examples
ACQuire:STATE
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350
acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
ACQuire:NUMAVg
This command sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up
an averaged waveform. Use the ACQuire:MODe command to enable the Average
mode. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition
Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab, and choosing
Average from the Acquisition Mode group box. Then enter the desired number
of waveforms that will be used to make up an averaged waveform in the # of
Wfms box.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-53
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe
Arguments
NR1 is the number of waveform acquisitions to average. The range of values is
Examples
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16 specifies that 16 waveform averages will be performed
before exponential averaging starts.
from 2 to 512 in powers of two.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 64 indicating that there
are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging.
ACQuire:NUMEnv
This command sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up
an envelope waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to setting the # of
Wfms in the Acquisition Setup menu when Envelope Acquisition mode is selected.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMEnv INFInite
ACQuire:NUMEnv?
Arguments
Examples
INFInite is the number of waveform acquisitions to be enveloped.
ACQUIRE:NUMENV? returns:ACQUIRE:NUMENV INFInite indicating that
acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped waveforms.
ACQuire:STATE
This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or RUN, a
new acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was a single acquisition
sequence, a new single sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition
was continuous, a new continuous acquisition will be started.
2-54
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition (for
example, averaging or enveloping), the acquisition sequence is restarted, and
any accumulated data is discarded. Also, the instrument resets the number of
acquisitions. If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode, a reset
occurs and acquired data continues to acquire.
Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP
button.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STATE {OFF|ON|RUN|STOP|<NR1>}
ACQuire:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:STOPAfter
OFF stops acquisitions.
STOP stops acquisitions.
ON starts acquisitions.
RUN starts acquisitions.
NR1 = 0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count
of the number of acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:STATE? might return:ACQUIRE:STATE 0 indicating that the
acquisition is stopped.
ACQuire:STOPAfter
This command sets or returns whether the instrument continually acquires
acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. This command is equivalent to
pressing SINGLE from the front panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
ACQuire:STOPAfter {RUNSTop|SEQuence}
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-55
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
ACQuire:STATE
RUNSTop specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data, if
ACQuire:STATE is turned on.
SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single-sequence acquisition.
Examples
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP sets the instrument to continually acquire data.
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? might return:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
indicating that the next acquisition the instrument makes will be of the
single-sequence type.
ALIas
This command sets or returns the state of alias functionality.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
ALIas?
Related Commands
Arguments
ALIas[:STATE]
OFF turns Alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when ALIas:STATE is off,
a command error (102) will be generated.
ON turns Alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
NR1=0 disables Alias mode; any other value enables Alias mode.
Examples
ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
ALIAS? might return :ALIAS:STATE 1 indicating that the alias feature is on.
ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns a list of the currently defined alias labels,
separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the query returns the string "".
2-56
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:CATalog?
Examples
ALIAS:CATALOG? might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG
"SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT" showing that there are three aliases
named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.
ALIas:DEFine
This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These
messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command
or query, provided that ALIas:STATE has been turned on. The query form of this
command returns the definitions of a selected alias.
NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error. To give a
new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias must first be deleted.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>}
ALIas:DEFine?
Related Commands
Arguments
ALIas[:STATE]
The first <QString> is the alias label.
This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter and can
contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed.
The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
The second<QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 256 characters.
Examples
ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON" defines an alias named "ST1" that sets
up the instrument.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-57
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1" returns:ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#246
:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON
ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)
This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.
An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte <QString>
Related Commands
Arguments
*ESR?, ALIas:DELEte:ALL
<QString> is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined value.
Examples
ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1" deletes the alias named SETUP1.
ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)
This command deletes all existing aliases.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Related Commands
Examples
ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL deletes all existing aliases.
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] (No Query Form)
Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte
Group
2-58
Alias
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] <QString>
<QString> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe]
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be an
existing alias.
Examples
ALIAS:DELETE[:NAME] “STARTUP” deletes the alias named STARTUP.
ALIas[:STATE]
Turns aliases on or off. This command is identical to the ALIas command.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas[:STATE] {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
ALIas[:STATE]?
Arguments
<NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when ALIas:STATE
is OFF, a command error (102) is generated. .9 or 9
<NR1> ≠ 0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
Examples
ALIAS[:STATE] OFF turns the command alias feature off.
ALIAS[:STATE]? returns 0 when the alias feature is off.
ALLEv? (Query Only)
This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. This command
is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
ALLEv?
Related Commands
*ESR?, EVMsg?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-59
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
ALLEV? might return :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform
to measure; "420,"Query UNTERMINATED;"
AUTOSet (No Query Form)
This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls
of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform. (To
autoset a video waveform, the video trigger must be set to video standard, not
custom.) This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel AUTOSET button. For
a detailed description of autoset functionality, see Autoset in the index of the
online help for your instrument.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUTOSet {EXECute|UNDo|VIDeo|VLines|VFields}
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:GRAticule
EXECute autosets the displayed waveform; this is equivalent to pressing the
front-panel AUTOSET button. If the display is set to a PAL, MV, or IRE graticule,
this argument forces the graticule display to full mode (frame, grid, and cross hair).
UNDo returns the instrument to the setting prior to executing an autoset.
VIDeo autosets the displayed waveform.
VLines autosets the displayed waveform.
VFields autosets the displayed waveform.
Examples
AUTOSET VFields sets the instrument to trigger on all video fields.
AUXout? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the auxiliary output setup and is equivalent to
selecting External Signals... from the Utilities menu, and then viewing the current
settings for the AUX OUT Configuration.
2-60
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUXout?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Examples
AUXout:SOUrce
AUXOUT? might return :AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE RISING indicating
that the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger and the polarity is set
to the rising edge of the trigger output signal.
AUXout:EDGE
Sets or returns the polarity of the auxiliary output.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUXout:EDGE {RISing|FALling}
AUXout:EDGE?
AUXout:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC connection. This
command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT Configuration from the Utilities
menu and then selecting the desired Configuration setting.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|BTRIGger|MAIn|DELayed}
AUXout:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
AUXout?
ATRIGger or MAIn sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger.
BTRIGger or DELayed sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed
trigger.
Examples
AUXOUT:SOURCE? might return :AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER, indicating that
the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-61
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BELl (No Query Form)
This command was previously used to beep an audio indicator and is provided for
backward compatibility.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
BELl
Examples
BELL is accepted but does nothing.
BUS? (Query Only)
This command returns the parameters for each bus.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS?
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
This command sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
{RATE10K|RATE20K|RATE33K|RATE50K|RATE62K|RATE83K|RATE100K|
RATE125K|RATE250K|RATE500K|RATE800K|RATE1M}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate?
Arguments
RATE10K sets the bit rate to 10 kbps.
RATE20K sets the bit rate to 20 kbps.
RATE33K sets the bit rate to 33 kbps.
2-62
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
RATE50K sets the bit rate to 50 kbps.
RATE62K sets the bit rate to 62 kbps.
RATE83K sets the bit rate to 83 kbps.
RATE100K sets the bit rate to 100 kbps.
RATE125K sets the bit rate to 125 kbps.
RATE250K sets the bit rate to 250 kbps.
RATE500K sets the bit rate to 500 kbps.
RATE800K sets the bit rate to 800 kbps.
RATE1M sets the bit rate to 1 Mbps.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe
This command sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe {CANH|CANL|RX|TX|DIFFerential}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe?
Arguments
CANH specifies a single-ended bus signal, active high.
CANL specifies a single-ended bus signal, active high.
RX specifies the receive signal.
TX specifies the transmit signal.
DIFFerential specifies a differential signal.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
This command sets or returns the sample point (in %) to sample during each
bit period.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-63
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint <NR3>
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint?
Arguments
<NR3> is the sample point in percent.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the CAN data source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the data source.
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt
Sets the display format for the numerical information in the bus waveform.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt {BINary|HEXadecimal}
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt?
Arguments
BINary specifies a binary data display.
HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display.
2-64
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe
Sets the display type for the bus. The bus can be set up to display the protocol
information, the logic waveforms that comprise the bus, or both.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe {BUS|WAVEForms|BOTh}
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe?
Arguments
BUS specifies to display the bus waveforms only.
WAVEforms specifies to display the logic waveforms only.
BOTh specifies to display both the bus and logic waveforms.
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the I2C SCLK source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the I2C SDATA source.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-65
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce?
CH<x> is the channel to use as the I2C SDATA source.
BUS:B<x>:POSition
This command sets or returns the position of the bus waveforms. This is just a
display function.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:POSition <NR3>
BUS:B<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the position.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity
This command sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity {FALL|RISe}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity?
Arguments
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the SPI SCLK source.
2-66
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the SPI SCLK source.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity
This command sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity?
Arguments
LOW specifies an active low polarity.
HIGH specifies an active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the SPI MISO source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|OFF}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source.
OFF specifies no source.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-67
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity
This command sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLARity?
Arguments
LOW specifies an active low polarity.
HIGH specifies an active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the SPI MOSI source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|OFF}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the SPI MOSI source.
OFF specifies no source.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity
This command sets or returns the SPI SS polarity.
Conditions
Group
2-68
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity {LOW|HIGH}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity?
LOW specifies an active low polarity.
HIGH specifies an active high polarity.
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the SPI SS source.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> is the channel to use as the SPI SS source.
OFF specifies no source.
BUS:B<x>:STATE
This command turns the bus on and off.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
BUS:B<x>:STATE?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the bus state.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the bus state.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-69
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
BUS:B<x>:TYPE
This command sets or returns the bus type: I2C, SPI or CAN.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:B<x>:TYPE {I2C|SPI|CAN}
BUS:B<x>:TYPE?
Arguments
I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.
CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus.
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the threshold for a channel. This setting applies to
all trigger types that use the channel.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
BUS:THReshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the threshold level, in volts.
ECL specifies a –1.3 V threshold level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V threshold level.
BUSY? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of the instrument. This command
allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application
program.
2-70
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
BUSY?
Related Commands
Returns
*OPC, *WAI
<NR1> = 0 means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive.
<NR1> = 1 means that the instrument is busy processing one of the commands
listed in the table below.
Commands that affect BUSY? response
Examples
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence)
Hard copy operation
HARDCopy STArt
Calibration step
Refer to the optional instrument Service Manual.
BUSY? might return :BUSY 1 indicating that the instrument is currently busy.
CAL? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of instrument calibration, including
internal signal path calibration, factory calibration, and probe calibration. This
query also returns the time until notification when the next factory calibration is
due. Refer to the service manual for factory calibration command descriptions.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CAL?
Related Commands
Examples
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
CAL? might return :CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS
PASS;:CALIBRATE:TEMPERATURE 32;FACTORY:FANCONTROL
2;STATUS PASS;STEPSTATUS FAIL;STEPSTIMULUS
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-71
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
"0.0,0,0,0,END";NOTIFY:HOURS 10500;YEARS 5.5000;DUE
DUE;:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC PASS;FACTORY PASS;FACTORY:VOLTAGE
PASS;FREQUENCY PASS;TRIGGER PASS;:CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1
1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1
*CAL? (Query Only)
Runs an internal self-calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status.
NOTE. Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting
self-calibration. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete.
No other commands are executed until calibration is complete.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
*CAL?
Returns
Examples
<NR1> = 1 indicates that the calibration did not complete successfully.
<NR1> = 0 indicates that the calibration completed without errors.
*CAL? starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that
the calibration was successful.
CALibrate:FACtory (No Query Form)
This command provides the controls for starting and stopping the factory
calibration process. The factory calibration process consists of a series of steps.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory {STARt|CONTinue|PREVious|ABOrt|DUmp}
Arguments
STARt initializes the factory calibration sequence and starts the first calibration
step.
CONTinue begins the next factory calibration step.
PREVious tries to run the most recent factory calibration step again.
ABOrt stops the calibration process.
2-72
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DUmp stops the calibration process and prints the calibration constants.
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY START starts the calibration process.
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE? (Query Only)
Queries if calibration is due.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?
Returns
Examples
<NR1> = 1 indicates the oscilloscope is due for calibration.
<NR1> = 0 indicates the oscilloscope is not due for calibration.
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:DUE? might return 0 indicating that factory
calibration is not due.
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs
Sets or returns hours when calibration is due.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs {INFInite|<NR1>}
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs?
Arguments
<NR1> is the number of hours, 500 to 10000, before the instrument displays a
notifier saying that calibration is due. Numbers entered are rounded to the nearest
valid number.
INFInite disables the calibration due notifier display feature.
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:HOURS 1500 sets the calibration notification
time to 1500 hours.
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:HOURS? might return :CALIBRATE:FACTORY:
NOTIFY:HOURS 2000 indicating that the calibration due notifier will be displayed
2000 hours after the last calibration.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-73
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs
Sets or returns the number of years when calibration is due.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs {INFInite|<NR3>}
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs?
Arguments
<NR3> is the number of years, 0.5 to 5, before the instrument displays a notifier
saying that calibration is due. Numbers entered are rounded to the nearest valid
number.
INFInite disables the calibration due notifier display feature.
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:YEARS 1.5e0 sets the calibration due time
to 1.5 years.
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:YEARS? might return CALIBRATE:FACTORY:
NOTIFY:YEARS 1.5E0 indicating that the calibration due notifier will be
displayed 1.5 years after the last calibration.
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus? (Query Only)
Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS? might return CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS
PASS indicating that factory calibration passed.
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTAtus? (Query Only)
Returns pass during oscilloscope power on without regard to actual calibration
status. Returns pass or fail for the factory calibration step that most recently
executed when factory calibration is in progress. Use this query to synchronize
programmed factory calibration steps.
Group
2-74
Calibration and Diagnostic
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTAtus?
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STEPSTATUS? might return
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STEPSTATUS FAIL if the last
oscilloscope calibration step did not pass.
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus? (Query Only)
Returns information about an input signal required for calibration.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus?
Examples
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STEPSTIMULUS? might return “2 volts on channel
1”, indicating a 2 V signal should be applied to channel 1.
CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC) of
the instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return
the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal
Related Commands
Examples
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL starts the internal signal path calibration of the
instrument.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-75
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC)
of the instrument. This command is the same as the CALibrate:INTERNal
command. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the
current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Related Commands
Examples
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:START starts the internal signal path calibration of the
instrument.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current status of the instrument internal
signal path calibration for the last SPC operation.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Related Commands
2-76
CAL?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Returns
This query will return one of the following:
INIT indicates the instrument has not had internal signal path calibration run.
WARMUP indicates the instrument has not warmed up for the required time
to perform signal path calibration.
PASS indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully.
FAIL indicates that the signal path calibration did not complete successfully.
TEMPDRIFT indicates that the instrument has not reached a state of stable
temperature adequate for performing signal path calibration.
RUNNING indicates that the signal path calibration is currently running.
Examples
CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS? might return
:CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS INIT indicating that the
current status of the internal signal path calibration is that it has not been run.
CALibrate:RESults? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory calibrations,
without performing any calibration operations. The results returned do not include
the calibration status of attached probes. The CALibrate:RESults? query is
intended to support GO/NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness:
all returned results should indicate PASS status if the instrument is "fit for duty".
It is quite common, however, to use uncalibrated probes (particularly when the
instrumentt inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables).
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the Utilities
menu and then viewing the contents of the Status field.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults?
Related Commands
Examples
CAL?
CALIBRATE:RESULTS? returns the status of all the calibration subsystems.
The query might return :CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC PASS;FACTORY
PASS;FACTORY:VOLTAGE PASS;FREQUENCY PASS;TRIGGER PASS
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-77
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory calibration,
without performing any calibration operations.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?
Examples
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY? might return :CALIBRATE:RESULTS:
FACTORY FREQUENCY PASS; TRIGGER PASS; VOLTAGE PASS.
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Frequency? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory frequency
calibration, without performing any calibration operations.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Frequency?
Examples
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:FREQUENCY? might return
:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:FREQUENCY PASS.
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Trigger? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory trigger
calibration, without performing any calibration operations.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Trigger?
Examples
2-78
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:TRIGGER? might return
:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:TRIGGER PASS.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Voltage? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory voltage
calibration, without performing any calibration operations.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Voltage?
Examples
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:VOLTAGE? might return
:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:FACTORY:VOLTAGE PASS.
CALibrate:RESults:SPC? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the status of the SPC operation. However, this
query does not cause an SPC to be run.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CAL?
INIT indicates that
PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed.
FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed.
SEQERROR
RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation is running.
CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC? returns the results of the last SPC operation: either
PASS or FAIL.
CALibrate:TEMPerature? (Query Only)
Returns the temperature during the last signal path compensation operation.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-79
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
CALibrate:TEMPerature?
CALIBRATE:TEMPERATURE? might return :CALIBRATE:TEMPERATURE
2.3E01 indicating that the instrument temperature during the last SPC operation
was 23 °C.
CH<x>? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical parameters for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is similar to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>?
Examples
CH1? might return the following vertical parameters for
channel 1: :CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09;COUPLING
DC;DESKEW0.0000E+00;OFFSET 0.0000E+00;POSITION
0.0000E+00;SCALE 5.0000E-01;TERMINATION 1.0000E+06;PROBCAL
INIT;PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E+00;RESISTANCE 1.0000E+06;UNITS
"V";ID:TYPE "1X";SERNUMBER "N/A";:CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000E+00;EXTUNITS "None";:CH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS 5
CH<x>:BANdwidth
This command sets or returns the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit filter of
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. This is equivalent to selecting Bandwidth from the Vertical menu.
The query form of this command always returns the maximum bandwidth of
the channel.
2-80
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:BANdwidth {TWEnty|TWOfifty|FULl|<NR3>}
CH<x>:BANdwidth?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
TWEnty sets the upper bandwidth limit to 20 MHz.
TWOfifty sets the upper bandwidth limit to 250 MHz.
FULl disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified channel operates
at its maximum attainable bandwidth.
<NR3> argument is a double-precision ASCII string. The instrument rounds this
value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this
value set the upper bandwidth.
Examples
CH1:BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz.
CH2:BANDWIDTH?, for TDS5052B and TDS5054B instruments, might return
:CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting
on channel 2.
For TDS5104 instruments, this query might return :CH2:BANDWIDTH
1.0000E+09 indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
CH<x>:COUPling
This command sets or returns the input attenuator coupling setting for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Coupling from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|GND}
CH<x>:COUPling?
Arguments
AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling.
DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling.
GND sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat, ground-level waveform
will be displayed.
Examples
CH2:COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground.
CH3:COUPling? might return :CH3:COUPling DC indicating that channel 3
is set to DC coupling.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-81
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:DESKew
This command sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Deskew from the Vertical Setup menu.
You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent, channel-based delay time
to the delay (set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels)
from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel. This lets
you compensate individual channels for different delays introduced by their
individual input hook ups.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>
CH<x>:DESKew?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from -25 ns to +25 ns with a
resolution of 1 ps. Out-of-range values are clipped.
CH4:DESKew 5.0E-9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns.
CH2:DESKew? might return :CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09 indicating that the
deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns.
CH<x>:INVert
This command sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel.
The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. When on,
the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel. This command
is equivalent to selecting On or Off for the Invert function in the Vertical Setup
control window.
NOTE. This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only. The
instrument does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs.
2-82
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF|NR1}
CH<x>:INVert?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
OFF argument turns off the invert function for the specified channel.
ON argument turns on the invert function for the specified channel.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the invert function; any other value turns on the invert
function.
Examples
CH4:INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4.
CH2:INVert? might return :CH2:INVERT 0 indicating that the invert function
for channel 2 is off.
CH<x>:OFFSet
This command sets or returns the vertical offset for the specified channel.
The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Offset from the Vertical menu.
This command offsets the vertical acquisition window (moves the level at the
vertical center of the acquisition window) for the selected channel. Visualize offset
as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased
offset values, and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values. The
resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control.
Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel
waveforms to help determine what data is acquired. The instrument always
displays the input signal minus the offset value. The channel reference marker will
move to the vertical graticule position given by the negative of the offset value
divided by the scale factor, unless that position is off-screen. If the computed
coordinate for the reference mark is off-screen, the mark moves to the nearest
screen limit and changes from a right-pointing arrow ( →) to an arrow pointing in
the appropriate off-screen direction.
The channel offset range is either ±100 V, ±10 V or ±1.0 V, depending on the
vertical scale factor.
Table 2-31: Vertical Scale Adjust Factors
When internal scale adjust gain is:
Product of Offset range, Probe gain, and transducer
gain is:
From
0.001
to 0.1
From
0.101
to 1.0
From
1.01 to
100
±1.0 V
±10.0 V
±100.0 V
NOTE. The above table describes instrument behavior only when no probe is
attached, and when the external attenuation factor is 1.0.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-83
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>
CH<x>:OFFSet?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:POSition
<NR3> is the offset value for the specified channel.
CH3:OFFSet 2.0E-3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV.
CH4:OFFSet? might return :CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03 indicating that the
offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV.
CH<x>:POSition
This command sets or returns the vertical position of the specified channel.
The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. The
position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized. This command is
equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Vertical menu and either viewing
or setting Position.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up,
and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. Position
adjusts only the display position of a waveform, whether it is a channel, math,
or reference waveform. The position value determines the vertical graticule
coordinate at which input signal values, minus the present offset setting for that
channel, are displayed. For example, if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2.0
and the offset is set to 3.0, then input signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed
2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
CH<x>:POSition?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-84
CH<x>:OFFSet, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
<NR3> is the position value, in divisions from the center graticule, ranging from
8 to -8 divisions.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
CH2:POSition 1.3E+00 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions
above the center graticule.
CH1:POSition? might return :CH1:POSITION -1.3000E+00 indicating that
the current position of Channel 1 is 1.3 divisions below the center graticule.
CH<x>:PRObe? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all information concerning the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of
x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe?
Examples
CH2:PROBE? might return :CH2:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E-01; RESISTANCE
1.0000E+07;UNITS "V";ID:TYPE "10X"’SERNUMBER "N/A" for a 10x
probe, indicating that (among other parameters) the attenuation factor for the probe
attached to channel 2 is 100.0 mV (assuming that probe units are set to volts).
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form)
This command executes the probe auto-zero operation.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss (No Query Form)
This command executes a probe degauss operation.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss EXECute
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-85
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the probe degauss state.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange
This command sets
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange <NR3>
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange?
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN
This command sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. The "gain" of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio.
For example, a common 10x probe has a gain of 0.1.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN <NR3>
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
2-86
CH<x>:SCAle
<NR3> is the probe gain. Allowed values depend on the specific probe.
CH2:PROBE:GAIN? might return :CH2:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00 indicating
that the attached 10x probe delivers 0.1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V
applied to the probe input.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the type and serial of the probe that is attached
to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Examples
CH2:PROBE:ID? might return :CH2:PROBE:ID:TYPE "10X";SERNUMBER
"N/A" indicating that a passive 10x probe of unknown serial number is attached
to channel 2.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the serial number of the probe that is attached
to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.
NOTE. For Level 0 and 1 probes, the serial number will be "N/A".
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Examples
CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER? might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER
"B010289" indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1
is B010289.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Level
2 (or higher) probes supply their exact product nomenclature; for Level 0 or 1
probes, a generic ’type string’ of "nnX" is returned.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-87
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?
Examples
CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE? might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE "P6203"
indicating that P6203-type probe is attached to channel 1.
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the resistance factor of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of
x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Examples
CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE? might return :CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE
10.0000E+06 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to
Channel 2 is 10 MΩ.
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal {BYPass|PASS}
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal?
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns a string describing the units of measure for
the probe attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two-channel instruments.
Group
2-88
Vertical
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
CH4:PROBE:UNITS? might return :CH4:PROBE:UNITS "V" indicating that the
units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts.
CH<x>:SCAle
This command sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Sending
this command is equivalent to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu
and then viewing or setting the Scale.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with constant
amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller.
Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects channel waveforms differently from
other waveforms:
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition
window as well as the display scale. The range and resolution of scale
values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have
specified.
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display only,
graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition
hardware.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
CH<x>:SCAle?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle,
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
<NR3> is the vertical channel scale in units per division.
CH4:SCALE 100E-03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
CH2:SCALE? might return :CH2:SCALE 1.0000E+00 indicating that the
current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-89
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CH<x>:TERmination
This command sets the connected/disconnected status of a 50 Ω resistor, which
may be connected between the specified channel’s coupled input and instrument
ground. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. There is
also a corresponding query that requests the termination parameter and translates
this enumeration into one of the two float values. This command is equivalent to
selecting Termination from the Vertical menu or toggling between termination
values from the VERTICAL area of the front panel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:TERmination <FIFty|MEG|NR3>
CH<x>:TERmination?
Arguments
FIFty sets the channel input resistance to 50 Ω.
MEG sets the channel input resistance to 1 MΩ.
<NR3> specifies the channel input resistance, which can be specified as 50 or
1,000,000 Ω.
Examples
CH4:TERMINATION 50.0E+0 establishes 50 Ω impedance on channel 1.
CH2:TERMINATION? might return :CH2:TERMINATION 50.0E+0 indicating
that channel 2 is set to 50 Ω impedance.
CH<x>:YUNits
This command sets or returns the units for the specified channel to a custom
string. String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will
generate an error.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:YUNits <QString>
CH<x>:YUNits?
CLEARMenu (No Query Form)
Clears the current menu from the display. This command is equivalent to pressing
the front panel MENU OFF button.
2-90
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
CLEARMenu
*CLS (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) clears the following:
Event Queue
Standard Event Status Register
Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates that
information is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message
will clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue
or MAV.
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This
will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed
when the *CLS command is executed.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*CLS
Related Commands
Examples
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
*CLS clears the instrument status data structures.
CURSor?
This query-only command returns all of the current cursor settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-91
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
CURSOR? might return the following as the current cursor settings:
:CURSOR:STATE 1;FUNCTION VBARS;LINESTYLE SOLID;MODE
INDEPENDENT;SOURCE1 CH1; SOURCE2 CH1;SCREEN:STYLE
LINES; :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1
-1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6; :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
300.0000E-3; POSITION2 -300.0000E-3;UNITS BASE;
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION1 -1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;
SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS BASE;STYLE LINE_X;:CURSOR:XY :PRODDELTA
99.1000E+36;PRODUCT1 99.1000E+36;PRODUCT2 99.1000E+36;
READOUT RECTANGULAR;RADIUS1 99.1000E+36;RADIUS2
99.1000E+36; RATDELTA 99.1000E+36;RATIO1 99.1000E+36;RATIO2
99.1000E+36; RDELTA 99.1000E+36;RECTX1 0.0000;RECTX2
0.0000;RECTY1 0.0000; RECTY2 0.0000;THDELTA 99.1000E+36;THETA1
99.1000E+36; THETA2 99.1000E+36;XDELTA 0.0000;YDELTA 0.0000
CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or returns the cursor type. Sending this command is equivalent
to selecting Cursor Type from the Cursors menu, and then choosing from the
drop-down list.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:FUNCtion {OFF|SCREEN|WAVEform}
CURSor:FUNCtion?
Arguments
OFF removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type.
SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Sources. Use
these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the
amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis
and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Examples
CURSOR:FUNCTION VBArs selects the vertical bar cursors type
CURSOR:FUNCTION? might return :CURSor:FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that
the screen cursors are currently selected.
2-92
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current settings for the horizontal bar
cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs?
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS? might return the horizontal
bar setting as :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
320.0000E-03;POSITION2-320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical difference between the two
horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
A floating point value with an exponent.
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA? might return :CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 5.0800E+00
indicating that the voltage difference between the two cursors is 5.08 V.
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
This command sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground,
which is expressed in vertical units (usually volts). The cursor is specified by x,
which can be 1 or 2. This command is the equivalent to selecting Cursor Position
from the Cursors menu, selecting the H Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing
or editing the desired cursor position.
Group
Cursor
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-93
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
CURSor:FUNCtion
<NR3> specifies the cursor position relative to ground.
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal
cursors at 25 mV.
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2? might return :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2
-64.0000E-03 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at -64 mV.
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
This command sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts {BASE|PERcent}
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Arguments
BASE selects the units current selected by the Vbar cursors.
PERcent selects ratio cursors.
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS might return :CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE indicating
that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base.
CURSor:HBArs:USE (No Query Form)
Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale. This command is only
applicable when ratio cursors are on.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:USE {CURrent|FIVEdivs}
Related Commands
2-94
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0% is the current position
of the lowest H Bar cursor and 100% is the current position of the highest H
Bar cursor. Moving the cursors after executing this command does not change
the 0% or 100% scale points.
FIVEdivs sets H Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is
100%, where 0% is -2.5 divisions and 100% is +2.5 divisions from the center
horizontal graticule.
Examples
CURSOR:HBARS:USE FIVEDIVS sets the H Bar measurement scale so that
5 screen major divisions equals 100%.
CURSor:MODe
This command sets or returns whether the two cursors move together in unison or
separately. This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Mode from the
Cursors menu, and then choosing from the drop-down list.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:MODe {TRACk|INDependent}
CURSor:MODe?
Arguments
TRACk ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.
INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.
Examples
CURSOR:MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison.
CURSOR:MODE? might return :CURSOR:MODE TRACK indicating that the two
cursors move in unison.
CURSor:VBArs? (Query Only)
This command returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs??
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-95
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP
CURSOR:VBARS?? might return the following vertical bar settings
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.0000E-06;POSITION2
9.0000E-06
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the horizontal difference between the two
vertical bar cursors. The units are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
command. The position can appear in units of Base or 1/Base.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
A floating point value with an exponent.
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA? might return :CURSOR:VBARS:DELTa 1.0640E+00
indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1.064 s.
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
Returns
2-96
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
<x> specifies the cursor. Valid values are 1 and 2.
<NR3> indicates the value of one of the tics. The units are specified by the
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS2? might return CURSOR:VBARS:HPOS2 1.00E-6,
indicating the value of one vertical bar tick.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
This command sets or returns the horizontal position for vertical bar cursors. The
cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Values are with respect to trigger
position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform (if horizontal
units are not set to time). Use the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command to specify
units. The position can appear in units of base or 1/base.
This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Setup from the Cursors menu,
selecting V Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing or editing the desired cursor
position.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
Returns
Examples
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
<NR3> specifies the cursor position.
A floating point value with an exponent.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION2 9.00E-6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor
at 9 ms.
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1? this command might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 1.0000E-06 indicating that the
cursor1 vertical bar is positioned at 1 ms.
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
This command sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-97
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts {SECOnds|HERtz|DEGrees|PERcent}
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
SECOnds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain (seconds).
HERtz sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain (Hertz).
DEGrees sets the units to degrees for use with an XY display.
PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors.
Returns
A string for SECOnds or HERtz, depending on the current vertical bar cursor units.
Examples
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS HERtz sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1/seconds.
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS? might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds.
CURSor:VBArs:USE (No Query Form)
Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale. This command only applicable
when ratio cursors are on.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:USE {CURrent|FIVEdivs}
Related Commands
Arguments
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 0% is the current position of
the left-most V Bar cursor and 100% is the current position of the right-most V
Bar cursor. Moving the cursors after executing this command does not change
the 0% or 100% scale points.
FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is
100%, where 0% is -2.5 divisions and 100% is +2.5 divisions from the center
vertical graticule.
Examples
2-98
CURSOR:VBARS:USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the
current cursor positions as 0% and 100% of scale if units are set to %.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa? (Query Only)
Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks. The units
are specified by the CURSor:HBArs:UNIts query.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
<NR3> indicates the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors.
CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA? might return CURSOR:VBARS:VDELTA 1.064E+0,
indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is
1.064 units.
CURVe
This command transfers waveform data to and from the instrument. Each
waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains
information such as data format and scale.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last data points are
specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument. The data
is stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination,
starting with the data point specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can
be transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the reference
is displayed.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
CURVe {<Block>|<asc curve>}
CURVe?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-99
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:DESTination, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre?,
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre?
<Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:
#<x><yyy><data><newline>, where:
<x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy>=500, then <x>=3)
<yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. If width is 1, then all bytes on
the bus are single data points. If width is 2, then all bytes on the bus are
2-byte pairs. If width is 4, then all bytes on the bus are 4-byte pairs. Use the
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr command to set the width.
<data> is the curve data.
<newline> is a single byte new line character at the end of the data.
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data
is <NR1>[,<NR1>...], where each <NR1> represents a data point.
Examples
CURVE? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively, and a width
set to 1 might return :CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59
NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and,
dependent upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can require several
seconds to complete. During this time, the instrument will not respond to user
controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a
device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another
command or query. In order to verify that curve data has been completely
transferred, it is recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR? query
and verify that the error bit returned and, if set, check the event queue to ascertain
the reason for the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query, then the
asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the *ESR? query was sent. In
this case, you may need increase your program’s time-out value in order to ensure
that all data is transferred and read.
CURVE <Block> sets the format of the waveform data, transferred to and from
the instrument, to binary format.
DATa
This command sets or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is
transferred with the CURVe command.
2-100
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa {INIT|SNAp}
DATa?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, DATa:ENCdg, SAVe:WAVEform:
FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Arguments
INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
SNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current V Bar/Paired/Split
cursor positions.
Examples
DATA? might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF1:ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE
CH1;START 1;STOP 500
DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
DATa:DESTination
This command sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform
data that is transferred into the instrument by the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:DESTination REF<x>
DATa:DESTination?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe
REF<x> is the reference where the waveform will be stored. The reference
number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
DATA:DESTINATION? might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF3 indicating that
reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for waveform
data. DATA:DESTINATION REF1 indicates that incoming waveform data be
stored in reference 1.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-101
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DATa:ENCdg
This command sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data. This
command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,
andWFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes the
corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and visa versa.
NOTE. Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format of the data
specified by DATa:SOUrce.
2-102
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:ENCdg
{ASCIi|FAStest|RIBinary|RPBinary|UNLocked|SRIbinary
|SRPbinary}
DATa:ENCdg?
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT, FLOAT. If ASCII is
the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored.
FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner
consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the
first waveform specified in the DATA:SOUrce list.
:ENCdg will always be BIN, :BYT_Or will always be LSB, but :BN_Fmt and
:BYT_Nr will depend on the first DATa:SOUrce waveform. :BN_Fmt will
be RI unless the waveform is internally stored as a floating point number, in
which case the FP format will be used.
RIBinary specifies signed integer data point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range is from -128 through 127. When :BYT_Nr
is 2, the range is from -32,768 through 32,767. When :BYT_Nr is 8, then
the waveform being queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode. Center
screen is 0 (zero). The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen
and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen. This is
the default argument.
RPBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the
most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr is 2, the
range is from 0 to 65,535. When :BYT_Nr is 8, then the waveform being
queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode. The center of the screen is
127. The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower
limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.
FPBinary specifies the floating point (width = 4) data.
The range is from –3.4 × 1038 to 3.4 × 1038. The center of the screen is 0. The
upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is
one division below the bottom of the screen.
The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math waveforms or ref
waveforms saved from math waveforms.
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
SFPbinary specifies floating point data in IBM PC format. The SFPbinary
argument only works on math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math
waveforms
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-103
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-32: DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings
Examples
WFMOutpre Settings
DATa:ENCdg
Setting
:ENCdg
:BN_Fmt
:BYT_Or
:BYT_NR
ASCii
ASC
N/A
N/A
1,2,4,8
FAStest
BIN
RI/FP
MSB
1,2,4
RIBinary
BIN
RI
MSB
1,2,8
RPBinary
BIN
RP
MSB
1,2,8
FPBinary
BIN
FP
MSB
4
SRIbinary
BIN
RI
LSB
1,2,8
SRPbinary
BIN
RP
LSB
1,2,8
SFPbinary
BIN
FP
LSB
4
DATA:ENCDG? might return :DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the
outgoing waveform data.
DATA:ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer
where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the location of waveform data that is transferred
from the instrument by the CURVe? Query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>]
DATa:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe
<wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the
instrument to the controller.
DATA:SOURCE? might return :DATA:SOURCE REF3 indicating that the source for
the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe? query is reference 3.
DATA:SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in the
next CURVe? query.
2-104
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DATa:STARt
This command sets or returns the starting data point for waveform transfer. This
command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the instrument.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:STARt <NR1>
DATa:STARt?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Arguments
<NR1> is the first data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
record length. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, the last
data point in the record is transferred.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is
greater than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE?
query.
Examples
DATA:START? might return :DATA:START 214 indicating that data point 214 is
the first waveform data point that will be transferred.
DATA:START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point
10.
DATa:STOP
This command sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when
using the CURVe? query. This command allows for the transfer of partial
waveforms to the controller.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the data:stop
value. As record length is varied, the data:stop value must be explicitly changed
to ensure the entire record is transmitted. In other words, curve results will not
automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from
data:start to data:stop stays smaller than the increased record length.
NOTE. When using the CURVe command, DATa:STOP is ignored and
WFMInpre:NR_Pt is used.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-105
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
DATa:STOP <NR1>
DATa:STOP?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
<NR1> is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to
the record length. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, then data will be
transferred up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are
greater than the record length, the last data point in the record is returned.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is less
than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to the maximum record length, or larger.
Examples
DATA:STOP? might return :DATA:STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last
waveform data point that will be transferred.
DATA:STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point
15000.
DATE
This command sets or returns the date that the instrument can display. This
command is equivalent to selecting Set Date & Time from the Utilities menu and
then setting the fields in the Date group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
DATE <QString>
DATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-106
TIME
<QString> is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd" where yyyy refers to a four-digit
year number, mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12, and dd refers
to a two-digit day number in the month.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DATE "2000-01-24" specifies that the date is set to January 24, 2000.
DATE? might return :DATE 2000-01-24 indicating the current date is set to
January 24, 2000.
*DDT
This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that are
executed when the instrument receives a *TRG command or the GET GPIB
interface message. Define Device Trigger (*DDT) is a special alias that the
*TRG command uses.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*DDT {<Block>|<QString>}
*DDT?
Related Commands
Arguments
ALIas, *TRG
<Block> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can contain
only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all
rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 80
characters. The format of this argument is always returned as a query.
<QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must
follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters.
Examples
*DDT #OACQUIRE:STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be
started each time a *TRG command is sent.
DESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to
the Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue.
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-107
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
DESE <NR1>
DESE?
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
<NR1> The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value, which ranges
from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value
11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most
significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the
DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
NOTE. Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes
to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the
Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.
Examples
DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE and OPC bits.
DESE? might return :DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary
value 10111010.
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion (No Query Form)
Sets the diagnostic loop option.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion {ALWAYS|FAIL|ONFAIL|ONCE}
Arguments
ALWAYS continues looping until diagnostics are stopped via the front panel or
by an instrument command.
FAIL causes looping until the first diagnostic failure or until diagnostics are
stopped.
ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is
returned from the test.
ONCE executes diagnostics test sequence once.
Examples
2-108
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION FAIL stops the diagnostic loop after the first failure.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
Sets the diagnostic loop option to run N times.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes <NR1>
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the number of diagnostic loops.
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 3 sets the diagnostic loop to run three times.
DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES? might return :DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 5,
indicating the diagnostic loop is set to run five times.
DIAg:LOOP:STOP (No Query Form)
Stops diagnostic at the end of the current loop.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:LOOP:STOP
Examples
DIAG:LOOP:STOP stops diagnostic at the end of the current loop.
DIAg:MODe
Select the test suite of diagnostics that is to be run.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:MODe {POST|EXTENDed|RTC|SERVice}
DIAg:MODe?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-109
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)
Returns the pass/fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution. The
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query can be used to determine which test(s) has failed.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
PASS indicating that all of the selected diagnostic tests have passed.
FAIL indicating that at least one of the selected diagnostic tests has failed.
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG? returns either DIAG:RESULT:FLAG PASS or FAIL.
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)
Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution.
The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with
the pass/fail status of each.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?
Related Commands
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?
Returns
Examples
2-110
<QString> in the following format:
<Status>--<Module name>[,<Status>--<Module name>...]
DIAG:RESULT:LOG? might return DIAG:RESULT:LOG
"pass--CPU,pass--Display,pass--Front
Panel,pass--IO,pass--Acquisition,pass--FDD,pass--Application
Key, pass--ROM".
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DIAg:SELect:ALL (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) selects all available diagnostics. This command is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then
choosing ALL from the Subsystem, Area and Test pull-down lists.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Examples
DIAG:SELECT:ALL selects all available diagnostics.
DIAg:SELect:<function> (No Query Form)
Sets the oscilloscope to run diagnostics on the specified system function.
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:<function>
Arguments
<function> specifies a single oscilloscope function on which to run diagnostics.
Valid values are:
ACQ test the acquisition system.
APPKey tests the application keys.
CPU tests the CPU.
DISplay tests the display.
FPAnel tests the front panel controls.
IO tests the IO ports.
ROM tests the system read only memory.
Examples
DIAG:SELECT:CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests.
DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) changes the oscilloscope operating state.
Depending on the argument, diagnostics capabilities are either turned on or off.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-111
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
This command is equivalent to opening the DIAg:STATE dialog (ON) or closing
it (OFF).
Group
Calibration and Diagnostic
Syntax
DIAg:STATE {ON|OFF}
Arguments
ON puts the instrument into the state in which diagnostics can be run.
OFF disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the oscilloscope to a normal
operating state.
Examples
DIAG:STATE OFF turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to
a normal operating state.
DISplay? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current Display settings. This command is
equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and then viewing
the contents of each tab.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay?
Examples
DISPLAY? might return :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW
MONOGREEN; RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE;USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100; CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4
240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0; REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4
240,90,100;MATH1 160,50,100; MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4
195,50,100; HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK
0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT; :DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT
YT;GRATICULE IRE;INTENSITY :WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
81.0000;RECORDVIEW 81.0000;:DISPLAY :INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
0;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800;
:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE DOTS;TRIGBAR OFF;TRIGT
1; CURSORTICK LONG;VARPERSIST 2.6000;SCREENTEXT:STATE
1; LABEL1:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT
:LABEL2:NAME "THIS IS SCREEN TEXT";XPOS 100;YPOS 20;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 35;
2-112
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME
:DISPLAY:WAVEFORM 1
"";XPOS 100;YPOS 50;
"";XPOS 100;YPOS 343;
"";XPOS 100;YPOS 80;
"";XPOS 100;YPOS 95;
"";XPOS 100;YPOS 110;
DISplay:CLOCk
This command sets or returns the display of the date and time. This is equivalent
to selecting Display Date & Time from the Display menu. The query form of this
command returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:CLOCk {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
DISplay:CLOCk?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATE, TIME
ON enables display of date and time.
OFF disables display of date and time.
<NR1> = 0 disables display of date and time; any other value enables display
of date and time.
Examples
DISPLAY:CLOCK ON enables display of date and time.
DISPLAY:CLOCK? might return :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1 indicating that the display
of date and time is currently enabled.
DISplay:FORMat (Query Only)
This command queries the display format, and always returns YT..
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:FORMat?
Arguments
YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-113
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DISPLAY:FORMAT? returns :DISPLAY:FORMAT YT is for the display format,
indicating that the display is in the YT mode.
DISplay:GRAticule
This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed. This
command is equivalent to selecting Graticule Style from the Display menu.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:GRAticule {CROSSHair|FRAme|FULl|GRId}
DISplay:GRAticule?
Arguments
CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs.
FRAme specifies a frame only.
FULl specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.
GRId specifies a frame and grid only.
Examples
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only.
DISPLAY:GRATICULE? might return :DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL indicating
that all graticule elements are selected.
DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the waveform saturation level, autobright state,
and screen saver settings. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup
from the Display menu and choosing the Appearance tab.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Arguments
2-114
None
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DISPLAY:INTENSITY? might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
75.0000;RECORDVIEW 10.0000;:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display. This is equivalent to setting
Backlight Intensity in the DISPLAY menu.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight {LOW|MEDium|HIGH}
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight?
Examples
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule
Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule <NR1>
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> is the graticule intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GRATICULE? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GRATICULE 30
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms. This command is equivalent to
adjusting the WAVEFORM INTENSITY knob.
Group
Display
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-115
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1>
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?
<NR1> is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 60
as the intensity of the waveforms.
DISplay:PERSistence
This command sets or returns the persistence aspect of the display. This affects
the display only and is equivalent to selecting Display Persistence from the
Display menu.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PERSistence {CLEAR|AUTO|MINImum|INFInite}
DISplay:PERSistence?
Arguments
CLEAR specifies the time, in seconds, that waveform points are displayed on the
screen.
INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition
system.
AUTO specifies that the waveform persistence is controlled by the front panel
WAVEFORM INTENSITY knob.
MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value
of 0.0E0.
Examples
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE VARPersist sets the persistence aspect of the display
to fade.
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE? might return :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF
indicating that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled.
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast
Sets or returns the video picture mode autocontrast setting.
2-116
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
Requires DPO40VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast?
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness, DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst, DISplay:PICture:
STATE
OFF or <NR1> = 0 disables picture autocontrast mode.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 enables picture autocontrast mode.
Examples
DISPLAY:PICTURE:AUTOCONTRAST? might return
DISPLAY:PICTURE:AUTOCONTRAST ON, indicating that the
video picture autocontrast mode is enabled.
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness
Sets or returns the video picture mode brightness setting.
Conditions
Requires DPO40VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness <NR1>
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness?
Related Commands
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast, DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst,
DISplay:PICture:STATE
Arguments
<NR1> sets the picture brightness value from 0 to 100.
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast must be OFF in order to set the
brightness value.
Examples
DISPLAY:PICTURE:BRIGHTNESS? might return
DISPLAY:PICTURE:BRIGHTNESS 34, indicating that the video
picture brightness setting is 34.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-117
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst
Sets or returns the video picture mode contrast setting.
Conditions
Requires DPO40VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst <NR1>
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast, DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness,
DISplay:PICture:STATE
<NR1> sets the picture contrast value from 0 to 100.
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast must be OFF in order to set the contrast value.
DISPLAY:PICTURE:CONTRAST? might return DISPLAY:PICTURE:CONTRAST
45, indicating that the video picture contrast setting is 45.
DISplay:PICture:STATE
Sets or returns the video picture mode setting.
Conditions
Requires DPO40VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:PICture:STATE <NR1>
DISplay:PICture:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness, DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst, DISplay:PICture:
AUTOContrast
OFF or <NR1> = 0 disables video picture mode.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 enables video picture mode.
2-118
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DISPLAY:PICTURE:STATE might return DISPLAY:PICTURE:STATE ON,
indicating that the video picture mode is enabled.
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly
This command sets a dots-only display.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns on the dots-only display.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the dots-only display.
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE
Sets or returns the video vectorscope state setting. This is equivalent to turning
Vectorscope mode on or off from the front panel.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> = 1 enables the vectorscope display mode.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 disables the vectorscope display mode.
Examples
DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:STATE might return DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:STATE
0 indicating that the vectorscope display mode is disabled (off).
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-119
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting?
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe
Sets or returns the video vectorscope display type setting.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe {ONEHundred|SEVENTYFive|<NR1>}
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe?
Arguments
ONEHundred or <NR1> ≥ 1 sets the vectorscope display mode to 100% colorbars.
SEVENTYFive or <NR1> ≤ 0 sets the vectorscope display mode to 75% colorbars.
Examples
DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:TYPE? might return DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:TYPE
1 indicating that the vectorscope display mode is set to 100%.
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting
Sets or returns the video vectorscope display type setting state. Note that this does
not actually turn on the vectorscope display type, but just sets the type value.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting {ONEHundred|SEVENTYFive|<NR1>}
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting?
Arguments
ONEHundred or <NR1> ≥ 1 sets the vectorscope display mode to 100%.
SEVENTYFive or <NR1> ≤ 0 sets the vectorscope display mode to 75%.
2-120
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:TYSETTING? might return
DISPLAY:VECTORSCOPE:TY_SETTING 1 indicating that the vectorscope
display mode is set to 100%.
DISplay:XY:MODe
Sets or returns the display mode. This command is equivalent to setting XY
Display in the DISPLAY menu.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:XY:MODe {OFF|TRIGger|GATEDxyz|VECtorscope}
DISplay:XY:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:XY:YCHannel, DISplay:XY:YREF, , , DISplay:FORMat
OFF sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the normal mode.
TRIGger displays the voltage of one waveform against the voltage of another.
The sources that make up an XY waveform are predefined and are listed in Table
2-10. Displaying one source causes its corresponding source to be displayed.
Table 2-33: XY format pairs
X-Axis source
Y-Axis source
Ch1
Ch2, Ch3, or Ch4
Ref1
Ref2, Ref3, or Ref4
GATEDxyz displays XY signals only when the Z (gating) channel is true. Gated
XYZ is similar to analog oscilloscope modulated XYZ mode except that the
displayed XY signal is either on or off; there is no intensity modulation. Gated
XYZ is useful for showing constellation diagrams. Use the DISplay:XY:ZCHannel
and DISplay:XY:ZLEVel commands to specify the Z channel and Z channel
threshold level.
VECtorscope sets the display to a video vectorscope display mode.
Examples
DISPLAY:XY:MODE OFF selects a voltage versus time format for the display.
DISPLAY:XY:MODE? might return DISPLAY:XY:MODE TRIGGER indicating a
triggered XY display format.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-121
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
DISplay:XY:YCHannel
Specifies the Y channel to be displayed with channel 1 in Triggered XY display
mode.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:XY:YCHannel {CH2|CH3|CH4|OFF}
DISplay:XY:YCHannel?
Related Commands
Arguments
DISplay:XY:MODe, DISplay:XY:YREF,
CH2, CH3, and CH4 specify the channel displayed with channel 1 in Triggered
XY Display mode.
OFF sets the Y Channel to off or none which turns off or prevents the CH1 versus
CH <x> waveform from being displayed in Triggered XY or prevents it from
coming on if Triggered XY is turned on later.
Examples
DISPLAY:XY:YCHANNEL CH2 sets channel 2 to be displayed with channel 1 in
Triggered XY mode.
DISPLAY:XY:YCHANNEL? might return DISPLAY:XY:YCHANNEL CH2 indicating
that channel 2 will be the Y channel in Triggered XY mode.
DISplay:XY:YREF
Specifies the Y channel to be displayed with reference 1 in Triggered XY display
mode.
Group
Display
Syntax
DISplay:XY:YREF?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-122
DISplay:XY:MODe, DISplay:XY:YCHannel
REF2, REF3, and REF4 specify the reference displayed with REF1 in Triggered
XY Display mode.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
OFF set the Y reference to off which turns off or prevents the REF1 versus
REF<x> waveform from being displayed in Triggered XY or prevents it from
coming on if Triggered XY is turned on later.
Examples
DISPLAY:XY:YREF REF2 sets REF2 to be displayed with REF1 in Triggered
XY mode.
*ESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register
(ESER). The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte
Register (STB). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see
Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESE <NR1>
*ESE?
Related Commands
Arguments
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
<NR1> specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value, which ranges
from 0 through 255.
The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of
the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.
Examples
*ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
*ESE? might return 186, showing that the ESER contains the binary value
10111010.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-123
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*ESR? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status
Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it).
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*ESR?
Related Commands
Examples
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
*ESR? might return 213, showing that the SESR contains the binary value
11010101.
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP/BOOTP server.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≥ 1 enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP
or BOOTP server in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the
oscilloscope.
NOTE. Do not use DHCP/BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been
assigned a static address on a network. If you set this command to ON, the
DHCP/BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information.
OFF or <NR1> ≤ 0 disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP
or BOOTP server.
Examples
2-124
ETHERNET:DHCPBOOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP
server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:DNS:IPADDRESS “128.196.13.352” sets the DNS IP address that
the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network.
ETHERnet:DOMAINname
Sets or returns the network domain name.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:DOMAINname <Qstring>
ETHERnet:DOMAINname?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the network domain name, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:DOMAINNAME “Alpha1.Mycorp.com” sets the domain name that
the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network.
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? (Query Only)
Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope. This is assigned
at the factory and can not be changed.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-125
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
ETHERNET:ENET:ADDRESS? returns an ethernet address such as
"02:00:e3:01:32:03"
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
This command sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:GATEWAY:IPADDRESS “128.143.16.1” sets the gateway IP
address.
ETHERnet:HTTPPort
Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:HTTPPort <QString>
ETHERnet:HTTPPort?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is an integer port number, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:HTTPPORT “45” sets the HTTP port value to 45.
ETHERnet:IPADDress
Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope.
Group
2-126
Ethernet
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
Examples
ETHERnet:IPADDress <QString>
ETHERnet:IPADDress?
<QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:IPADDRESS “123.121.13.214” sets the oscilloscope’s IP address.
ETHERnet:NAME
Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:NAME <QString>
ETHERnet:NAME?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:NAME “labscope1” sets the oscilloscope’s network name.
ETHERnet:PASSWord
This command sets or returns the Ethernet access password.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:PASSWord <old>,<new>
ETHERnet:PASSWord?
Arguments
<old> is the current password, enclosed in quotes. If there is no current password,
enter a null character (two quotes with no character between).
<new> is a new password, enclosed in quotes.
Examples
ETHERNET:PASSWORD “karma2”,”ZEN53” replaces the current Ethernet
password karma2 with the new password ZEN53.
ETHERNET:PASSWORD? might return :ETHERNET:PASSWORD “ZEN53”.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-127
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value.
Group
Ethernet
Syntax
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask <QString>
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask?
Arguments
Examples
<QString> is the subnet mask value, enclosed in quotes.
ETHERNET:SUBNETMASK “255.255.255.0” sets the subnet mask value using
standard IP address notation format.
EVENT? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns an event code from the Event Queue that
provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also
removes the returned value from the Event Queue.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVENT?
Related Commands
Examples
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
EVENT? might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a
command header.
EVMsg? (Query Only)
This query-only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that
is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code
along with an explanatory message. For more information, see Event Handling.
2-128
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVMsg?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
ALLEv?
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?
Returns
Examples
The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event
Code><Comma><QString>...]<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned
when a command error is detected by the instrument. As much of the command
will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the
<Message> and <Command> string combined. The command string is
right-justified.
EVMSG? might return :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".
EVQty? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the number of event codes that are in the Event
Queue. This is useful when using the ALLEv? query, since it lets you know
exactly how may events will be returned.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
EVQty?
Related Commands
Examples
ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
EVQTY? might return :EVQTY 3, indicating the number of event codes in the
Event Queue.
FACtory (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory default settings.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on
the instrument front panel or selecting Recall Default Setup from the File menu.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-129
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults:
Clears the Event Status Enable Register.
Clears the Service Request Enable Register.
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255.
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE.
Purges all defined aliases.
Enables all Command Headers.
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a "zero-length field."
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.
This command does not reset the following:
The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1-1987) interface.
The selected GPIB address.
Calibration data that affects device specifications.
Protected user data.
Stored settings.
The current password (if you set one).
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
FACtory
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
None
FACTORY resets the instrument to its factory default settings.
FASTAcq? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is
equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button on the front panel.
Group
2-130
Acquisition
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
FASTAcq?
FASTACQ? might return the following string for the current acquisition parameters:
:FASTACQ:STATE 0
FASTAcq:STATE
This command sets or returns the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is
equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
FASTAcq:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
FASTAcq:STATE?
Arguments
ON enables Fast Acquisitions mode.
OFF disables Fast Acquisitions mode.
<NR1> = 0 disables Fast Acquisitions mode; any other value enables Fast
Acquisitions mode.
Examples
FASTACQ:STATE ON enables the Fast Acquisitions mode.
FASTACQ:STATE? might return :FASTACQ:STATE 1 indicating that Fast
Acquisitions mode is currently active.
FILESystem? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the directory listing of the current working
directory. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR? query.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem?
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte,
FILESystem:DIR?, FILESystem:REName
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-131
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
None.
FILESYSTEM? might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR,
".","..","myFile.txt","myWaveform.wfm".
FILESystem:COPy (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file. The new file
may be in a totally separate directory than the old file. You can only copy one file
at a time using this command. Wild card characters are not allowed.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:COPy {<source file path>,<destination file path>}
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
FILESYSTEM:COPY "C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET",
"C:\ANOTHERDIR\COPYOFTEK001.SET" copies the file named
TEK00001.SET, located in the MYDIR directory on the C drive to a file named
COPYOFTEK001.SET in the ANOTHERDIR directory on the C drive.
FILESystem:CWD
This command sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB
commands. The default working directory is "C:\TekScope". Anytime that you
use this command to change the directory, the directory that you specify is retained
as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete
the directory. If you delete the current working directory, the instrument resets
current working directory to the default directory (C:\TekScope) the next time the
instrument is powered on or the next time you execute a file system command.
The current working directory is retained between power cycles.
2-132
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
This command supports the permutations of file and directory names that are
supported by Microsoft Windows:
Relative path names; for example, ".\Temp"
Absolute path names; for example, "C:\Windows\System"
Implied relative path names; for example "newfile.text" becomes
"C:\TekScope\newfile.txt" if the current working directory is "C:\TekScope"
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>}
Arguments
Examples
<new working directory path> is a quoted string that defines the current
working; a directory name can be up to 128 characters.
FILESYSTEM:CWD "C:\TekScope\images" sets the current working directory
to images.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return :FILESYSTEM:CWD
"C:\TekScope\Waveforms" indicating that the current working directory
is set to Waveforms.
FILESystem:DELEte (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) deletes a named file. It does not delete directories.
Use the FILESystem:RMDir command to delete a directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD
, FILESystem:RMDir
Arguments
Examples
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
FILESYSTEM:DELETE "NOT_MINE.SET" deletes the file named
NOT_MINE.SET from the current working directory.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-133
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the
name of a file or directory in the current working directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:DIR?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir
None
FILESYSTEM:DIR? returns a list of files and directories in the current working
directory.
FILESystem:FREESpace? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the number of bytes of free space on the current
drive.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:FREESpace?
FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) creates a new directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>
Related Commands
Arguments
2-134
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR?
<directory path> is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "C:\NewDirectory" creates the directory named
NewDirectory at the root of the C drive.
These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the
existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the C drive:
FILESYSTEM:CWD "C:\MyDirectory"; FILESYSTEM:MKDIR
"MyNewSubDirectory"
This, of course, assumes that C:\MyDirectory already existed and was not a
read-only directory.
FILESystem:REName (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an existing file.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path>
Related Commands
Arguments
FILESystem:CWD
<old file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
<new file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
Examples
FILESYSTEM:RENAME "C:\TEK00000.SET","C:\MYSETTING.SET" gives
the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file
remains in the root directory on the C drive.
FILESystem:RMDir (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The directory cannot
contain any files. If there are files in the directory, they must first be deleted. The
directory must not be a read-only directory.
Group
File System
Syntax
FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-135
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FILESystem:CWD
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the
file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file
name.
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "C:\OldDirectory" removes the directory named
OldDirectory from the root of the C drive.
FPANEL:PRESS (No Query Form)
Duplicates the action of pressing a specified front-panel button.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
FPANEL:PRESS <button>
Arguments
<button> is a name of a front-panel button. Most of the argument names
associate directly with their front panel button. For example, AUTOSet is for the
AUTOSET button. The few commands that do not have obvious associations
are listed below.
Table 2-34: FPAnel:PRESS arguments
2-136
Argument
Description
ACQuire
Acquire MENU button
BMENU<x>
Screen bottom menu buttons, where <x>=1
for the left-most bottom menu button and
<x>=7 for the right-most bottom menu button
BUS<x>
Bus select buttons, where <x> = 1 or 2.
CH<x>
Channel select button, where <x>=1 for
channel 1, <x>=2 for channel 2, and so on
CLEARMenu
MENU OFF button
MAGnify
MAGNIFY button
MEASUrement
MEASURE button
OFF
Vertical menu waveform channel OFF button
RMENU<x>
Screen side menu buttons, where <x>=1 for
the top-most side menu button and <x>=5 for
the bottom-most side menu button
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-34: FPAnel:PRESS arguments, (cont.)
Examples
Argument
Description
TRIGger
Trigger MENU button
VERTical
Vertical MENU button
FPANEL:PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset function.
FPANEL:TURN (No Query Form)
Duplicates the action of turning a specified front-panel control knob.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
FPANEL:TURN <knob>
Arguments
<knob> is the name for a rotating control. Most of the argument names associate
directly with their front panel knob. For example, GPKNOB is for the general
purpose knob, HORZSCALE is for the horizontal scale knob, and so on.
, (comma) separates the control knob argument from the numeric rotation value
argument. You do not need a white space between the arguments and the comma.
<n> represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation. Negative values
represent a counterclockwise knob rotation, and positive values represent a
clockwise rotation. The magnitude of <n> specifies the amount of the turn, where
<n> = 1 represents turning the knob one unit, <n> = 2 represents turning the knob
two units, <n> = 5 represents turning the knob five units, and so on. The range of
units depends on which front panel knob is specified.
Examples
FPANEL:TURN TRIGLEVEL,10 duplicates turning the front panel Trigger LEVEL
knob clockwise by 10 units.
GPIBUsb:ADDress? (Query Only)
This command returns the GPIB/USB address.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:ADDress?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-137
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
GPIBUsb:HWVersion
This command sets or returns the GPIB/USB hardware version.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:HWVersion
GPIBUsb:HWVersion?
GPIBUsb:ID? (Query Only)
This command sets or returns the GPIB/USB ID.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:ID?
GPIBUsb:SETADDress (No Query Form)
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:SETADDress
GPIBUsb:SETID (No Query Form)
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:SETID
GPIBUsb:STATUS
2-138
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
GPIBUsb:STATUS
GPIBUsb:STATUS?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
HARDCopy (No Query Form)
This command sends a copy of the screen display to the active printer using the
current palette and layout settings.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy
Related Commands
Examples
*WAI, *CLS
HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active system printer.
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter
Sets or returns the currently active printer. When a hardcopy operation is
performed, the output will be sent to this printer. One of two methods of
specifying the printer can be used: an index value obtained from looking at the list
of attached printers, or by specifying the printer name.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter {<NR1>|<name>}
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter?
Arguments
<NR1> is the index of the desired printer as returned from HARDCopy:PRINTer:
LIST?
<name> is the name of the printer as specified in the printer list. This name is case
sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the list.
HARDCopy:INKSaver
Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background
while retaining waveform color information (except for channel 1, which prints
a dark blue because yellow does not show up well is difficult to see on a white
background). This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink
required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images. Returns 1 when
inksaver is on and 0 when inksaver is turned off.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-139
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:INKSaver?
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the ink saver mode on.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the ink saver mode off.
Examples
HARDCOPY:INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output and preview
commands to display grayscale menus on a white background.
HARDCopy:LAYout
This command sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:LAYout {PORTRait|LANdscape}
HARDCopy:LAYout?
Arguments
PORTRait orients the screen image vertically on the printed page.
LANdscape orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page.
Examples
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT LANDSCAPE sets the hard copy page orientation to
Landscape.
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT? might return :HARDCOPY:LAYOUT PORTRAIT indicating
that the hard copy page orientation is set to portrait.
HARDCopy:PREVIEW (No Query Form)
Causes a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied
to be displayed.
2-140
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PREVIEW {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 turns preview mode On.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns preview mode Off.
HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD (No Query Form)
Adds a network printer to the list of available printers. All three arguments must
be present, but only one of server name or server IP address must be specified. An
empty string can be used for blank arguments.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD <name>,<server>,<address>
Arguments
<name> - The name of the network printer queue.
<server> - The host name of the print (LPR) server.
<address> - The IP address of the print server.
HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete (No Query Form)
Removes a network printer from the list of available printers. Either the index
from HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST? or the printer name can be used as an
argument. The printer name is case-sensitive.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete {<index>|<name>}
Arguments
<index> is the index of the printer to be deleted
<name> is the name of the printer to be deleted.
HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST? (Query Only)
Returns the list of currently attached printers.
Group
Hard Copy
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-141
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST?
HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName (No Query Form)
Renames a network printer on the list of available printers, replacing the currently
stored settings with the settings specified in the command. Either the index
from HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST? or the printer name can be used as the first
argument. Four arguments must be present, but the arguments may be empty
strings if the value for a field is to be deleted.
Group
Hard Copy
Syntax
HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName
{<index>|<name>},<new_name>,<new_server>,<new_address>
Arguments
<index> is the index of the printer to be deleted.
<name> is the name of the printer to be deleted.
<new_name> is the new name for this printer.
<new_server> is the new print server for this printer.
<new_address> is the new IP address for the server.
HDR
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for backward
compatibility purposes.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
HDR {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
HDR?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-142
HEADer, VERBose
OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the instrument to
omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the instrument
to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query
response as a command.
<NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets
this state to true, which causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses.
Examples
HDR OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses, so that
only the argument is returned.
HDR? might return :HEADER 1, indicating that the instrument is including
headers on applicable query responses.
HEADer
This command sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the
instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses.
NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk); these commands never return headers. This
command does make a corresponding change in the Response Header Enable
State of the opposite interface (physical or virtual GPIB interface). Refer to
Introduction for more information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
HEADer {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
HEADer?
Related Commands
Arguments
HDR, VERBose
OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the instrument to
omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the instrument
to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query
response as a command.
<NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets
this state to true, which causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses.
Examples
HEADER OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses,
so that only the argument is returned.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-143
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
HEADER? might return :HEADER 1 indicating that the instrument is including
headers on applicable query responses.
HORizontal? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all settings for the horizontal commands.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal?
Examples
HORIZONTAL? might return the following horizontal settings
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION 50.0000;TIME
0.00000000000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO
1.0000;SCALE 40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING "s";:HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
500;RESOLUTION 500;ROLL AUTO;FASTFRAME:STATE
1;READOUTS 0;SUMFRAME NONE;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE
OVERLAY;FRAMESTART:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH1
1;MATH2 1;MATH3 1;MATH4 1;REF1 1;REF2 1;REF3 1;REF4
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1
2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2 2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1
2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4 2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH
500;COUNT 2;SELECTED:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1
2;MATH2 2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4
2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH4;FRAME
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH? (Query Only)
Returns the record length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?
HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the time per division of the time base. This
command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu.
2-144
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn?
Examples
HORIZONTAL:MAIN? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO
1.0000;SCALE 40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING "s"
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
This command sets or returns the time base trigger delay mode. This command is
equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz/Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
ON enables the time base trigger delay mode.
OFF disables the time base trigger delay mode.
<NR1> = 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode, any other value enables the
time base trigger delay mode.
Examples
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE ON enables the time base trigger delay mode.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE? might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1
indicating that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled.
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe
This command sets or returns the time base trigger delay mode. This command is
equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz/Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-145
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe?
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
ON enables the time base trigger delay mode.
OFF disables the time base trigger delay mode.
<NR1> = 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode, any other value enables the
time base trigger delay mode.
Examples
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY:STATE ON enables the time base trigger delay mode.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY:STATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE
1 indicating that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled.
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
This command sets or returns the time base trigger delay time. This command is
equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and choosing a
value for Horiz Delay.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
<NR3> specifies the time base trigger delay time setting, typically represented in
seconds.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 5.0E-3 sets the time base trigger delay time to 5 ms.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY
5.0000E-05 indicating that the time delay setting is 5 µs.
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition? (Query Only)
This query-only command always returns a horizontal position of 50%.
2-146
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition??
Related Commands
Examples
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION? returns :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION
5.0000E+01 indicating that the horizontal position of the waveform on the screen
is currently set to 50 percent.
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current horizontal sample rate.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
Related Commands
Examples
HORizontal:RESOlution
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE 2.5000E+09 indicating that
the sample rate is currently set to 2.5 GS/s.
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its horizontal
scale on the display and is identical to the HORizontal:SCAle command.
The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting. This command
is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and then
choosing a Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle?
Arguments
<NR3> is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps through 40 s.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-147
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
HORIZONTAL[:MAIN]:SCALE 2E-6 sets the main scale to 2µs per division.
HORIZONTAL[:MAIN]:SCALE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
2.0000E-06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 µs per division.
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its horizontal
scale on the display and is identical to the HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAlecommand.
The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting. This command
is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and then
choosing a Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps through 40 s.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV 2E-6 sets the main scale to 2µs per division.
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
2.0000E-06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 µs per division.
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the units for the horizontal time base. It is
equivalent to HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
Related Commands
Examples
2-148
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS?? might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS
STRING "Hz".
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing? (Query Only)
This command sets or returns the units string for the horizontal time base trigger
delay.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
Related Commands
Examples
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING "Hz" indicating that the
horizontal units string is set to Hertz.
HORizontal:PREViewstate? (Query Only)
Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the acquisition system is in the
preview state.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:PREViewstate?
Returns
<NR1> = 1 if the acquisition system is in the preview state.
<NR1> = 0 if the acquisition system is not in the preview state.
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in
each frame. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record
length. This command is equivalent to selecting Resolution from the Horiz/Acq
menu and then entering the desired Rec Length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-149
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths, which range
from 500 through 400K data points. For more information about valid data point
ranges, select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal &
Acquisition tab.
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 50000 specifies that 50000 data points will be
acquired for each record.
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH? might return :HORIZONTAL:RECOrdlength
5000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data points.
HORizontal:RESOlution
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points
in each frame. The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to
maintain a constant time per division. The query form of this command returns
the current horizontal record length. This command is equivalent to adjusting the
RESOLUTION knob on the front panel.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:RESOlution <NR1>
HORizontal:RESOlution?
Arguments
Examples
<NR1> represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths, which range
from 500 through 400K data points. For more information about valid data point
ranges, select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal &
Acquisition tab.
HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION 50000 specifies that 50000 data points will be
acquired for each record.
HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION? might return :HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION 5000
indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data points.
HORizontal:ROLL? (Query Only)
This command queries the Roll Mode status. Use Roll Mode when you want to
view data at very slow sweep speeds. It is useful for observing data samples on
the screen as they occur.
Group
2-150
Horizontal
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
HORizontal:ROLL?
HORIZONTAL:ROLL? might return :HORIZONTAL:ROLL OFF indicating that the
Roll Mode is disabled.
ID? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns identifying information about the instrument
and related firmware.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
ID?
Related Commands
Examples
*IDN?
ID? might return :TEK/TDS5404,CF:91.1CT,FV:01.00.912. This indicates the
instrument model number, configured format, and firmware version number.
*IDN? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the instrument identification code.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*IDN?
Related Commands
Examples
ID?
*IDN? might return :TEKTRONIX,TDS5054B,10000001,CF:91.1CT
FV:01.00.912, indicating the instrument model number, serial number,
configured number, and firmware version number.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-151
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
LANGuage
Sets or returns the user interface display language. This command only affects
the oscilloscope displayed language. Remote commands and their responses
are always in English.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LANGuage
{ENGLish|FRENch|GERMan|ITALian|SPANish|PORTUguese|JAPAnese|KOREan|RUSSi
LANGuage?
Examples
LANGUAGE? might return :LANGUAGE ENGLISH.
LANGuage:INCRement (No Query Form)
Changes the oscilloscope display language to the next language in the sequence.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LANGuage:INCRement
LOCk
This command enables or disables all front-panel buttons and knobs, including
the touch screen. There is no front panel equivalent.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
LOCk {ALL|NONe}
LOCk?
Related Commands
Arguments
UNLock
ALL disables all front panel controls.
NONe enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL
command.
2-152
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the LOCk
NONe command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section
2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Examples
LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls.
LOCK? might return :LOCK NONE indicating that the front panel controls are
enabled by this command.
*LRN? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings
(except for configuration information for the calibration values), allowing you to
record or "learn" the current instrument settings. You can use these commands
to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the *LRN? query.
This command is identical to the SET? Command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*LRN?
Related Commands
Examples
SET?
*LRN? might return the following response: :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV
10;NUMAVG 16;NUMSAMPLES 16000;SAMPLINGMODE
IT;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT
236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE
RUNNING;WINDOW FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:VARIABLE:EVENT:REPORT BOTH;:AUXOUT:SOURCE
ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE
0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW
TEMPERATURE;RECORDVIEW NORMAL;USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1
180,50,100;CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1
0,90,0;REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1
160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4
195,50,100;HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK
0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-153
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK (No Query Form)
Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK {NEXT|PREVious}
MARK:CREATE (No Query Form)
Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:CREATE {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH|COLUMN}
Arguments
CH<x> creates the mark on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel number.
REF<x> creates the mark on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.
MATH creates the mark on the math waveform.
COLUMN creates marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column.
MARK:DELEte (No Query Form)
Deletes a mark on a particular waveform, all waveforms in a column, or all marks.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:DELEte {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH|COLUMN|SELECTED|ALL}
Arguments
CH<x> deletes the marks on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel
number.
REF<x> deletes the marks on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference
waveform number.
MATH deletes the marks on the math waveform.
COLUMN deletes the marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column.
2-154
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SELECTED deletes the selected mark.
ALL deletes all marks.
MARK:FREE? (Query Only)
Returns how many marks are free to be used
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:FREE?
MARK:SELected:END? (Query Only)
Returns the end of the selected mark, in terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:END?
MARK:SELected:FOCUS? (Query Only)
Returns the focus of the selected mark, in terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn? (Query Only)
Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-155
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK:SELected:OWNer? (Query Only)
Returns the owner of the selected mark, for example, USER, SEARCH1.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:OWNer?
Returns
<QString> is the owner of the mark.
MARK:SELected:SOURCE? (Query Only)
Returns the source waveform of the selected mark.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?
MARK:SELected:STARt? (Query Only)
Returns the start of the selected mark, in terms of 0 to 100% of the waveform.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:STARt?
MARK:SELected:STATe? (Query Only)
Returns the on or off state of the selected mark.
2-156
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:STATe?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition? (Query Only)
Returns the position of the selected mark, in terms of 0 to 100% of the upper
window.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?
MARK:TOTal? (Query Only)
Returns how many marks are used.
Group
Mark
Syntax
MARK:TOTal?
MATH[1]:DEFIne
This command allows you to define a new waveform using mathematical
expressions. The mathematical expression can be a string of the form
<wfm><operation><wfm>, where wfm are any combination of live channels or
reference waveforms, and operation is any of +, -, * or /, If the string is in the form
FFT(<wfm>) where wfm is any live channel or reference waveform, FFT math is
performed. Otherwise, if the contents of the string can be parsed by the advanced
math parser without errors, advanced math is performed. The Dual Wfm Math,
FFT and Advanced Math menus on the front panel contain controls that allow
building equivalent math expressions to those described above.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:DEFIne <QString>
MATH[1]:DEFIne?
Related Commands
Arguments
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
<QString> quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines
the waveform.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-157
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-35: Advanced Math expression elements
Expression
Examples
Description
CH1-CH4, REF1-REF4
Specifies a waveform data source.
FFT( , INTG( , DIFF(
Executes a Fast Fourier Transform,
integration, or differentiation operation on the
expression that follows. The FFT operator
must be the first (left-most) operator in an
expression. All these operations must end
with a right parenthesis.
AMPlitude( , AREa( , BURst( , CARea(
CMEan( , CRMs( , DELay( , FALL( ,
FREQuency( , HIGH( , LOW( , MAXimum( ,
MEAN( , MINImum( , NDUty( , NOVershoot(
, NWIdth( , PDUTy( , PERIod( , PHAse(
PK2pk( , POVershoot( , PWIdth( , RISe( ,
RMS(
Executes the selected measurement
operation on the waveform (active or
reference) that follows. All these operations
must end with a right parenthesis.
VAR1, VAR2
Adds the user-defined variable to the
expression. Refer to the MATH:VAR<x>
command.
+,-,*,/
Executes an addition, subtraction,
multiplication, or division operation on the
following expression. + and - are also unary;
use - to negate the expression that follows.
(),
Parentheses provide a way to control
evaluation order in an expression. The
comma is used to separate the "from"
and "to" waveforms in Delay and Phase
measurement operations.
1-0 , . , E
Specifies a numeric value in (optional)
scientific notation.
MATH1:DEFINE" CH1+CH2" adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform,
storing the results in Math 2.
MATH:DEFINE? might return
:MATH1:DEFINE "CH2*REF2" as the expression that defines Math 1.
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or math waveforms
that only have reference waveform source waveforms.
Group
2-158
Math
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is the % of the math waveform (divided by 100) that precedes center
Examples
MATH:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 1.0E–1 sets the horizontal position to 10%
screen. It can vary from 0.0e0 to 1.0e0.
pretrigger
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for dual math
waveforms that have source waveforms that are reference waveforms. The
horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source waveform is set
through the HORizontal:SCAle command.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the math horizontal scale in seconds.
MATH:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return MATH:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.0E-4
indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 m
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs
Sets or returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs <QString>
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs?
Arguments
<QString> is a text label to apply to horizontal units when the horizontal unit
is "?" (unknown unit value).
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-159
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS might return MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS "?"
indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default
question mark unit.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG
This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the math
string. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. If you
are using the standard math, this command is equivalent to selecting Magnitude
Spectrum from the Math menu and then selecting the units that you want from the
Scale button drop-down menu. If you are using the Advanced Analysis functions,
this command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu,
choosing the Mag tab, and then clicking the desired Scale button.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAR|DB}
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG?
Arguments
LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear.
DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels.
Examples
MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math2 to decibels.
MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG? might return :MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB indicating
that the SpectralMag units for Math2 are set to decibels.
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow
This command sets or returns the window function used to multiply the spectral
analyzer input data for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. A spectral window determines what the
filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain. It can be
described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point-by-point times the
input data to the spectral analyzer. This command is equal to selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu, and choosing from the Window Type drop-down list.
Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function used to multiply
the spectral analyzer input data. The windows are listed in the order of their
ability to resolve frequencies (resolution bandwidth). For additional information
2-160
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
about spectral windows, see Selecting a Spectral Window in the online help for
this instrument.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow {RECTangular|
HAMming|HANning|BLAckmanharris}
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow?
Arguments
RECTangular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one.
HAMming window function is based on a cosine series.
HANning window function is based on a cosine series.
BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series.
Examples
MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral
analyzer input data.
MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW? might return :MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral
analyzer input data is the Hamming window.
MATH[1]:TYPe
Sets or returns the math waveform mode type.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:TYPe {ADVanced|DUAL|FFT}
MATH[1]:TYPe?
Arguments
ADVanced sets the math waveform mode to advanced math. TDS3AAM only.
DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math.
FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math. TDS3AAM, TDS3FFT only.
Examples
MATH:TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-161
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or returns the vertical position of the specified Math
waveform. The position value is usually applied to the signal before it is digitized.
The highest three units/div scale ranges of a given math are implemented by
changing the way the acquired data is displayed. When the instrument is operating
in any of these highest three scale ranges, the position control operates only on
the signal after it is digitized. Note that if a signal that exceeds the range of the
digitizer in one of these three scale ranges is repositioned, the displayed waveform
will contain clipped values on-screen. This command is equivalent to selecting
Position/Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Pos value or adjusting
the front-panel Vertical POSITION knob.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up, and
decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. Position adjusts
only the display position of a waveform, whether a channel, math, or reference
waveform. The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at
which input signal values, equal to the present offset setting for that reference, are
displayed. For example, if the position for Math 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is
set to 3.0, then the input signals equal to 3.0 are displayed 2.0 divisions above
the center of the screen.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined and
enabled, or when a math string changes. After the math waveform is computed
for the first time, the instrument determines the min + max of that waveform
data. Then, the instrument sets the math position so that (min + max)/2 is in
the center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math scale so that
the range of the min and max cover 6 divisions. This autoscaling process can
take up to 1/2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position
commands for that math waveform received during this time. You should insert an
appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math waveform
before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
2-162
CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
<NR3> is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule.
MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 positions the Math 2 input signal
1.3 divisions higher than a position of 0.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION? might return :MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION
-1.3000E+00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1.3 divisions
below the center graticule.
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.
This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and
then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting the front-panel Vertical SCALE knob.
Each waveform has its own vertical scale parameter. For a signal with constant
amplitude, increasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller.
Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms. For reference and math waveforms, the scale setting
controls the display only, graphically scaling these waveforms and having no
affect on the acquisition hardware.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined and
enabled, or when a math string changes. After the math waveform is computed
for the first time, the instrument determines the min + max of that waveform
data. Then, the instrument sets the math position so that (min + max)/2 is in
the center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math scale so that
the range of the min and max covers 6 divisions. This autoscaling process can
take up to 1/2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position
commands for that math waveform received during this time. You should insert an
appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math waveform
before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CH<x>:SCAle, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
<NR3> is the scale, in volts, amps or watts per division. The range is from
100.0E-36 through 100.0E+36.
MATH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division.
MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE? might return :MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000E+00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-163
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs
Sets or returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs <QString>
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs?
Arguments
Examples
<Qstring> is a text label to apply to vertical units when the vertical unit is "?"
(unknown unit value).
MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS? might return MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS "joules"
indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules.
MATHVAR? (Query Only)
This command queries all 8 numerical values you can use within math
expressions.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATHVAR?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
MATHVAR:VAR<x>, MATH[1]:DEFIne
<NR3> are the stored numerical values.
MATHVAR? returns the values of all variables stored in locations 1 through 8.
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
This command sets or returns one of 8 different numerical values you can use
within math expressions. These values can range from -9.9e37 to 9.9e37; the
default values are 0.0. <x> specifies the location, 1 through 8, in which you can
store values. Stored math variables can be reference within math expressions as
VAR1, VAR2,...VAR8.
2-164
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
For example, the following command defines MATH1 as the product of Channel
1 and math variable 1: MATH1:DEFINE "CH1 * VAR1".
Group
Math
Syntax
MATHVAR:VAR<x> <NR3>
MATHVAR:VAR<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MATHVAR:VAR<x>, MATH[1]:DEFIne
<NR3> specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x <1 through 8>.
MATHVAR:VAR3 -2.43E-5 stores the value -2.43e-5 in the third math variable
location.
MATHVAR:VAR3? might return :MATHVAR:VAR3 24.3000E-6 for the
expression stored in location 3.
MEASUrement? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all measurement parameters in the following
order: MEAS1, MEAS2, MEAS3, MEAS4, MEAS5, MEAS6, MEAS7, MEAS8,
and IMMED.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement?
Examples
MEASUREMENT? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING
OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-165
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION.
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot (No Query Form)
Removes the measurement snapshot display.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Examples
MEASUrement:GATing
This command specifies or returns the measurement gating setting. This command
is equivalent to selecting Gating from the Measure menu and then clicking the
desired Measurement Gating setting.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:GATing {OFF|SCREen|CURSor}
MEASUrement:GATing?
Arguments
OFF turns off measurement gating.
SCREen turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.
CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors
as limits.
MEASUREMENT:GATING? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between
the vertical bar cursors.
2-166
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all immediate measurement setup parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
AMPLITUDE; UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;
SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE; EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS; :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT; ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns information about the immediate delay
measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from
the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab and then clicking the Delay button.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;
DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines
the delay "to" edge when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the delay "to" waveform.
This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay
settings and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-167
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards|FORWards}
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
BACKWards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last
rising or falling edge in the waveform.
FORWards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the
first rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the
beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating
that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last
rising or falling edge.
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "from" or "to"
waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is
specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE<x>.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x> {FALL|RISe}
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>?
Arguments
<x> specifies which waveform to use, where <x> = 1 is the "from" waveform, and
<x> = 2 is the "to" waveform.
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE specifies that the "from" waveform
rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1? returns either RISE or FALL.
2-168
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
This command sets or returns the source for all single channel immediate
measurements and specifies the source to measure "from" when taking an
immediate delay measurement or phase measurement. This command is
equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the
Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking
the desired Source1 (From) setting.
NOTE. If you do not specify a numerical suffix, the source is assumed to be
SOURCE 1.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
CH<x> is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel
models.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
REF<X> is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
HIStogram indicates histogram as the object to be measured.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 MATH1
specifies Math1 as the immediate measurement source.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3
is the immediate measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
This command sets or returns the source to measure "to" for phase or delay
immediate measurements. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-169
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button
to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source2 (To) setting.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types,
which require both a target (Source1) and reference (Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE
CH<x> is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel
models.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
REF<X> is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
HIStogram indicates histogram as the object to be measured.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 REF3 sets the waveform in reference memory
location 3 as the delay "to" source when making delay measurements.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math1
is the immediate measurement source.
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
This command sets or returns the immediate measurement type.
2-170
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe {AMPlitude|AREa|
BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|DISTDUty|
EXTINCTDB|EXTINCTPCT|EXTINCTRATIO|
EYEHeight|EYEWidth|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH|
HITs|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum|
NCROss|NDUty|NOVershoot|NWIdth|PBASe|
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PCROss|PCTCROss|PDUty|PEAKHits|PERIod|
PHAse|PK2Pk|PKPKJitter|PKPKNoise|
POVershoot|PTOT|PWIdth|QFACtor|RISe|
RMS|RMSJitter|PMSNoise|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|
SIGMA3|SIXSigmajit|SNRatio|STDdev| UNDEFINED|WAVEFORMS}
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Arguments
AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it
measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or
gated region.
Amplitude = High - Low
AREa measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or
gated region and is measured in volt-seconds. The area measured above the
ground is positive, while the area below ground is negative.
BURst measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is made over the entire
waveform or gated region.
CARea (cycle area) measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in
volt-seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the
gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive,
while the area below the common reference point is negative.
CMEan (cycle mean) measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the
waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
CRMs (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle
in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
DELay measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude
point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
DISTDUty (duty cycle distortion) measures the time between the falling edge and
the rising edge of the eye pattern at the mid reference level. It is the peak-to-peak
time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid-reference as a percent
of the eye period.
EXTINCTDB measures the extinction ratio of an optical waveform (eye diagram).
Extinction Ratio (dB) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic
High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB. This
measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform
saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction dB = 10 × (log 10 (High / Low)
EXTINCTPCT measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform.
Extinction Ratio (%) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic
Low (off) to the logic (High) (on) of an optical waveform and expresses the
result in percent. This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a
reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-171
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Extinction % = 100.0 × (Low / High)
EXTINCTRATIO measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform.
Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High
to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result without units.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform
saved in fast acquisition mode. Extinction ratios greater than 100 or less than 1
generate errors; low must be greater than or equal to 1 µW.
Extinction Ratio = (High / Low)
EYEHeight measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts.
EYEWidth measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds.
FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to a
low reference value (default is 10%).
FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency
is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz = 1
cycle per second.
HIGH measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of
a waveform.
You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken over the entire
waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform.
HITs (histogram hits) measures the number of points in or on the histogram box.
LOW measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of
a waveform.
MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive peak
voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. When
histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the maximum
measurement measures the voltage of the highest nonzero bin in vertical
histograms or the time of the right-most bin in horizontal histograms.
MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform
or gated region. When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod
command, the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired points
within or on the histogram.
MEDian (histogram measurement) measures the middle point of the histogram
box. Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than this
value and half are greater than this value.
MINImum finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative
peak voltage. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. When
histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the minimum
measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time
of the left-most nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms.
2-172
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NCROss (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point to the first
falling edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at
the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
NDUty (negative duty cycle) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in
the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NOVershoot (negative overshoot) finds the negative overshoot value over the
entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Overshoot = (Low - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIdth (negative width) measurement is the distance (time) between the middle
reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement
is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
PBASe measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements.
PCROss (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point to the first
positive edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at
the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
PCTCROss measures the location of the eye crossing point expressed as a
percentage of EYEHeight.
Crossing percent = 100 ×[(eye-crossing-point - PBASe)/(PTOP - PBASe)]
PDUty (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first cycle in the
waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%
PEAKHits measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram.
PERIod is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated
region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
PHAse measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags
the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made
between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in
degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
PK2Pk (peak-to-peak) finds the absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region. When histogram is
selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the PK2Pk measurement
measures the histogram peak to peak difference.
PKPKJitter measures the variance (minimum and maximum values) in the
time locations of the cross point.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-173
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PKPKNoise measures the peak-to-peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference
level.
POVershoot
The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive overshoot value
over the entire waveform or gated region.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - High) / Amplitude ×100%
PTOT measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements.
PWIdth (positive width) is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made
on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
QFACtor measures the quality factor. The Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye
diagram, which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at the low
and high logic levels. It is the ratio of the eye size to noise.
RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The rise time is
the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a
low reference value (default is 10%) to a high reference value (default is 90%).
RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire
waveform or gated region.
RMSJitter measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point. The
RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point.
RMSNoise measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at
the mid reference level.
SIGMA1 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram mean.
SIGMA2 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram mean.
SIGMA3 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean.
SIXSigmajit (histogram measurement) is six × RMSJitter.
SNRatio measures the signal-to-noise ratio. The signal-to-noise ratio is the
amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level.
STDdev measures the standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS) deviation) of
all acquired points within or on the histogram box.
UNDEFINED is the default measurement type, which indicates that no measurement
type is specified. Once a measurement type is chosen, it can be cleared using
this argument.
2-174
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WAVEFORMS (waveform count) measures the number of waveforms used to
calculate the histogram.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement
to be a frequency measurement.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPe RMS
indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage.
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the units of the immediate measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts "s"
indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds.
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the value of the measurement specified by the
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is immediately taken
on the source(s) specified by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.
NOTE. A change to HORizontal:MAIn:SCALe or CH<x>:SCALe will not
necessarily have taken affect if followed by this command.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE, *ESR?,
ALLEv?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-175
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
9.9000E+37. If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it,
then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEv? commands.
MEASUrement:INDICators? (Query Only)
Returns all measurement indicator parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE MEAS1;NUMHORZ
0;NUMVERT 4;HORZ1 7.5E0;HORZ2 -3.400000095367E0;HORZ3
0.0E0;HORZ4 0.0E0;VERT1 -6.351123E-6;VERT2
-3.179753E-6;VERT3 -6.40943E-6;VERT4 -6.403E-6
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator <x>, where
<x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:HORZ1? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:HORZ1 -2.0E-3indicating that horizontal
indicator1 has a value of -2mV.
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ? (Query Only)
Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being
displayed.
Group
2-176
Measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ? might
returnMEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ 2 indicating that
there are currently 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule showing where
the measurement specified by MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE is being
performed.
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT? (Query Only)
Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMVERT? might
returnMEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMVERT 2 indicating that
there are currently 2 vertical lines drawn on the graticule showing where
the measurement specified by MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE is being
performed.
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE
Set or returns the state of visible measurement indicators. Performs the same
operations as the front panel Measurement Indicators menu.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE {OFF|MEAS<x>}
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE?
Arguments
OFF turns off visible measurement indicators.
MEAS<x> turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement
<x>, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. There must be an active measurement before
you can activate an indicator for a specified measurement.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE MEAS2 turns on the display of visible
measurement indicators for measurement 2.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-177
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE? might return
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF indicating that no
measurement indicators are active.
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>? (Query Only)
Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator <x> from the
trigger point, where <x> can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. A negative value means that the
indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:VERT2? might
returnMEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:VERT2 -3.724507E-6
indicating that the second measurement indicator is positioned 3.72 ms before
the trigger point.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all measurement parameters for the displayed
measurement specified by x, which can range from 1 through 8. This query
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu
and viewing the Measurements table; then choosing the Time tab, clicking the
Delay button and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Examples
2-178
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;
DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the number of values accumulated for this
measurement since the last statistical reset. Some values may have been ignored
because they generated an error. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT
3.247000000E+03.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the delay measurement parameters for the
measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. Measurement
parameters are presented in the following order: Edge1, Edge2, and Direction.
This query command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu,
choosing Delay and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that
determines the delay "to" edge when taking a delay measurement. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform. This
command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay
from the drop-down list and then clicking the desired Search Direction setting.
Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-179
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards|FORWards}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
BACKWards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform
and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> command to specify the slope
of the edge.
FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform
and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> command to specify the slope
of the edge.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from
the end of the waveform record.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:DELAY:DIRECTION? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that the
current search direction is backwards.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
Sets or returns the slope of the edge that is used for the delay "from" or "to"
waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is
specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1].
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> {FALL|RISe}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>?
Arguments
<x> specifies which waveform to use, where <x> = 1 is the "from" waveform, and
<x> = 2 is the "to" waveform.
FALL specifies the falling edge.
RISe specifies the rising edge.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE specifies that the "from" waveform
rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1? returns either RISE or FALL.
2-180
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the maximum value found for this measurement
since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM 4.18E-9.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the mean value accumulated for this
measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN
514.71E-09.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the minimum value found for this measurement
since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM 1.75E-09.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-181
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
This command sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements and
specifies the source to measure "from" when taking a delay measurement or phase
measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu and then choosing the desired measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
CH<x> is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel
models.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
REF<x> is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
HIStogram is a histogram.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 MATH1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement
2 source.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE1? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE[1] MATH1 indicating that
Math1 is the measurement 2 source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
This command sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements and
specifies the reference source to measure "to" when taking a delay measurement
or phase measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the
Measure menu, selecting a measurement type of either Phase or Delay, and then
choosing the desired measurement source.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types,
which require both a target (Source1) and reference (Source2) source.
2-182
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
CH<x> is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel
models.
MATH<y> is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
REF<x> is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH1 specifies CH1 as the delay "to" source
when making delay measurement.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math 1
is the measurement 2 source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
This command sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed
and displayed. The measurement slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the
Measure menu and then clicking the Display button.
For a measurement to display, you must have selected a source waveform
and defined the measurement you want to take and display. You select the
measurement using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command.
You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
command.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-183
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
<NR1> = 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot; any
other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE ON computes and displays the measurement
defined as measurement 2.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the standard deviation of values accumulated
for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV
21.0E-12.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
This command sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified
measurement slot. The measurement slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the
Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement type.
2-184
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe {AMPlitude|AREa|
BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|DISTDUty|
EXTINCTDB|EXTINCTPCT|EXTINCTRATIO|EYEHeight|
EYEWidth|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH|HITs|LOW|
MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum|NCROss|NDUty|
NOVershoot|NWIdth|PBASe|PCROss|PCTCROss|PDUty|
PEAKHits|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk|PKPKJitter|
PKPKNoise|POVershoot|PTOT|PWIdth|QFACtor|
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
RISe|RMS|RMSJitter|PMSNoise|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|
SIGMA3|SIXSigmajit|SNRatio|STDdev|UNDEFINED| WAVEFORMS}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
Arguments
AMPlitude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it
measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or
gated region.
Amplitude = High - Low
AREa measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or
gated region and is measured in volt-seconds. The area measured above the
ground is positive, while the area below ground is negative.
BURst measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is made over the entire
waveform or gated region.
CARea (cycle area) measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in
volt-seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the
gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive,
while the area below the common reference point is negative.
CMEan (cycle mean) measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the
waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
CRMs (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle
in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
DELay measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude
point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
DISTDUty (duty cycle distortion) measures the time between the falling edge and
the rising edge of the eye pattern at the mid reference level. It is the peak-to-peak
time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid-reference as a percent
of the eye period.
EXTINCTDB measures the extinction ratio of an optical waveform (eye diagram).
Extinction Ratio (dB) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic
High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB. This
measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform
saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction dB = 10 × (log 10 (High / Low)
EXTINCTPCT measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform.
Extinction Ratio (%) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic
Low (off) to the logic (High) (on) of an optical waveform and expresses the
result in percent. This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a
reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction % = 100.0 × (Low / High)
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-185
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
EXTINCTRATIO measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform.
Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High
to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result without units.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform
saved in fast acquisition mode. Extinction ratios greater than 100 or less than 1
generate errors; low must be greater than or equal to 1 µW.
Extinction Ratio = (High / Low)
EYEHeight measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts.
EYEWidth measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds.
FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the
waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to a
low reference value (default is 10%).
FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency
is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz = 1
cycle per second.
HIGH measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of
a waveform.
You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken over the entire
waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform.
HITs (histogram hits) measures the number of points in or on the histogram box.
LOW measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of
a waveform.
MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive peak
voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. When
histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the maximum
measurement measures the voltage of the highest nonzero bin in vertical
histograms or the time of the right-most bin in horizontal histograms.
MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform
or gated region. When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod
command, the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired points
within or on the histogram.
MEDian (histogram measurement) measures the middle point of the histogram
box. Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than this
value and half are greater than this value.
MINImum finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative
peak voltage. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region. When
histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the minimum
measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time
of the left-most nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms.
2-186
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NCROss (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point to the first
falling edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at
the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
NDUty (negative duty cycle) is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in
the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NOVershoot (negative overshoot) finds the negative overshoot value over the
entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Overshoot = (Low - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIdth (negative width) measurement is the distance (time) between the middle
reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement
is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
PBASe measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements.
PCROss (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point to the first
positive edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at
the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
PCTCROss measures the location of the eye crossing point expressed as a
percentage of EYEHeight.
Crossing percent = 100 ×[(eye-crossing-point - PBASe)/(PTOP - PBASe)]
PDUty (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first cycle in the
waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%
PEAKHits measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram.
PERIod is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated
region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
PHAse measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags
the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made
between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in
degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
PK2Pk (peak-to-peak) finds the absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region. When histogram is
selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the PK2Pk measurement
measures the histogram peak to peak difference.
PKPKJitter measures the variance (minimum and maximum values) in the
time locations of the cross point.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-187
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
PKPKNoise measures the peak-to-peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference
level.
POVershoot
The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive overshoot value
over the entire waveform or gated region.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - High) / Amplitude ×100%
PTOT measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements.
PWIdth (positive width) is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made
on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
QFACtor measures the quality factor. The Q factor is a figure of merit for an eye
diagram, which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to the noise at the low
and high logic levels. It is the ratio of the eye size to noise.
RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The rise time is
the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a
low reference value (default is 10%) to a high reference value (default is 90%).
RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire
waveform or gated region.
RMSJitter measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point. The
RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point.
RMSNoise measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at
the mid reference level.
SIGMA1 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram mean.
SIGMA2 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram mean.
SIGMA3 (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the
histogram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean.
SIXSigmajit (histogram measurement) is six × RMSJitter.
SNRatio measures the signal-to-noise ratio. The signal-to-noise ratio is the
amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level.
STDdev measures the standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS) deviation) of
all acquired points within or on the histogram box.
UNDEFINED is the default measurement type, which indicates that no measurement
type is specified. Once a measurement type is chosen, it can be cleared using
this argument.
2-188
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WAVEFORMS (waveform count) measures the number of waveforms used to
calculate the histogram.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a
measurement of the frequency of a waveform.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the units associated with the specified
measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Related Commands
Examples
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNITS? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts %
indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the value that has been calculated for the
measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command
is equivalent to selecting Display Statistics from the Measure menu and then
choosing Value from the drop-down list to display all measurement values
on-screen.
NOTE. This is the displayed value in the on-screen display. If measurement
statistics are enabled, a new value is calculated with every waveform. In addition,
this value is updated about every 1/3 second. If you are acquiring a long
acquisition record, the instrument may take longer to update.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-189
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Examples
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, *ESR?, ALLEv?
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALUE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALue
2.8740E-06. If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it,
then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEv? commands.
MEASUrement:METHod
This command sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0% and 100%
reference level. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from
the Measure menu and then choosing the desired Determine Base, Top From
setting.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:METHod {Auto|HIStogram|MINMax}
MEASUrement:METHod?
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:
LOW, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID, MEASUrement:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID2
Arguments
HIStogram sets the high and low reference levels to the most common values
either above or below the mid point, depending on whether the high reference
point or the low reference point is being defined. Because the statistical approach
ignores short-term aberrations, such as overshoot or ringing, the histogram method
is the best setting for examining pulses.
MINMax uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This selection
is best for examining waveforms with no large, flat portions of a common value,
such as sine waves and triangle waves.
Auto chooses the best method (histogram or minmax) for each dataset.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:METHOD HISTOGRAM specifies that the high and low reference
levels are set statistically.
MEASUREMENT:METHOD? might return :MEASUREMENT:METHOD MINMAX
indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.
2-190
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:REFLevel? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current reference level parameters. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu,
and then viewing the current Reference Levels settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Examples
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL? might return these reference level settings
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE; ABSOLUTE:HIGH
0.0000E+00;LOW 0.0000E+00; MID1 0.0000E+00;MID2 0.0000E+00;
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 9.0000E+01;LOW
1.0000+01;MID1 5.0000E+01; MID2 5.0000E+01
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
This command sets or returns the high reference level, and is the upper reference
level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This
command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent
to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the
Absolute High Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-191
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71 sets the high reference level
to 1.71 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.7100E+00 indicating that the
absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
This command sets or returns the low reference level, and is the lower reference
level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This
command affects the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent
to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the
Absolute Low Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0 sets the low reference level
to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00 indicating
that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
This command sets or returns the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference
level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command
affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements and
2-192
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then
entering the Absolute Mid Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 .71 sets the mid reference level
to .71 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID 0.7100E+00 indicating
that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to .71 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
This command sets or returns the mid reference level for the "to" waveform
when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects
the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels
from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Mid2 Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-193
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5 sets the mid reference level
for the delay waveform to 0.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5000E+00 indicating that the
absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for measurement
calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the
Measure menu, and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units
group box.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when
precise values are required (for example, when designing to published interface
specifications, such as RS-232-C).
PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
Examples
2-194
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit
user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT indicating that
the reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and
LOW.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
This command sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the high reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the
results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference
Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage High Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default high
reference level is 90%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95 sets the high reference level
to 95% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90 indicating that the
percentage high reference level is set to 90% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
This command sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the low reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-195
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference
Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
<NR3> is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default low
reference level is 10%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 15 sets the high reference level to
15% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10 indicating that the
percentage high reference level is set to 10% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
This command sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the
results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements and is equivalent
to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and, then entering the
Percentage Mid Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
2-196
Measurement
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default mid
reference level is 50%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1 60 sets the mid reference level
to 60% of HIGH.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65 indicating that the
percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
This command sets or returns the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is
used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects the
results of delay measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels
from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage Mid2 Ref value.
NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
<NR3> is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default mid
reference level is 50%.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level
to 40% of HIGH.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-197
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45 indicating that the
percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:SNAPShot (No Query Form)
Displays the measurement snapshot list on the oscilloscope screen, which is a list
of the immediate values of all available measurements for the active signal.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Examples
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
This command controls the operation and display of management statistics. This
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu,
clicking the Statistics button and then choosing the desired Measurement Format.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE {OFF|ON}
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE?
Related Commands
Arguments
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
OFF turns all measurements off. This is the default value.
ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.
Examples
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE OFF turns statistic measurements off.
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE ON indicating that
measurement statistics are turned on and all statistics are being displayed for
each measurement.
2-198
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
This command sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation
statistical accumulations. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement
Setup from the Measure menu, clicking the Statistics button and entering the
desired Weight n= value.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting <NR1>
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
<NR1> is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation statistical
accumulations.
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to 4.
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING? might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4 indicating that
measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4.
MESSage:BOX
Defines the size and position of the message window. This command does not
display the window unless MESSage:STATE is ON.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:BOX <X1>,<X2>,<Y1>,<Y2>
MESSage:BOX?
Arguments
<X1> and <X2> = 0 to 639, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis.
<X1>defines the left and <X2>defines the right side of the window.
<Y1> and <Y2> = 0 to 479, and are pixel positions along the vertical axis. <Y1>
defines the top and <Y2> defines the bottom of the window. The reserved height
of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully
display characters.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-199
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MESSage:CLEAR (No Query Form)
Removes the message text from the message window.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:CLEAR
Examples
MESSAGE:CLEAR removes the message from the message box.
MESSage:SHOW (No Query Form)
Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in
the window.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:SHOW <QString>
Arguments
<QString> is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the
TDS Character Chart in Appendix A as well as characters from the Cyrillic,
Korean, Japanese, and Chinese character sets. The maximum length of the
message is 1000 characters; longer strings are ignored.
The message area is the height and width you have set using the MESSage:BOX
command. The length of the message that fits in the message area depends on the
contents of the message because the width of characters varies.
If the message exceeds the limits of the message box, either horizontally or
vertically, the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed.
The message string itself is not altered. The entire message can be returned as a
query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box.
The message is left-justified, and is displayed on a single line starting with the
top most line in the window. A new line character can be embedded in the string
to position the message on multiple lines. You can also use white space and tab
characters to position the message within a line. Text which does not fit within
the message box is truncated. Defining a message box text string erases any
previously displayed text within the message box.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (\t or \x09) followed by two
characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least
significant eight bits of a 16-bit number. The number specifies the pixel column
2-200
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
relative to the left margin of the message area. For example, to tab to pixel 13,
send TAB (\t or \x09), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).
For example, using hexadecimal escape sequences, MESSAGE:SHOW
’\x09\x01\x17Hello’ when sent as a command would cause the ’Hello’ to be
displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the
MESSAGE:BOX command. If you want to display characters starting at position
279, then 279 = 0x0117; split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01
and 0x17 and send \x09\x01\x17.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-201
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where
the first character is an escape (0x1b) and the second character is as follows:
Bit 7 — 0
Bit 6 — If set, inverse video is toggled from current state and the following
text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again.
Remaining bits are ignored.
Bit 5 — If set, the color index in the four LSB’s (bits 0 through 3) is applied
to the foreground or background color depending on the fg/bg bit (bit 4).
Bit 4 — If set, color change is applied to the background, otherwise applies to
the foreground.
Bit 0-3 — Specifies the color index (0 through 15) to change color to as
follows:
Index 0 Black (background)
Index 1 Yellow (Ch1)
Index 2 Cyan (Ch2)
Index 3 Magenta (Ch3)
Index 4 Green (Ch4)
Index 5 Red (math)
Index 6 White (reference)
Index 7 Orange
Index 8 Gray (graticule)
Index 9 White (text)
Index 10 Tek Blue
Index 11 Bright Blue
Index 12 undefined
Index 13 Blue
Index 14 undefined
Index 15 Dark Blue
The ESC (escape) character followed by the @ character turns inverse
video on or off and can be embedded in the message string. Example:
"[email protected]@ghi" specifies the string "abcdefghi" where the "def" portion
is displayed in inverse video.
Example: "abcESC#defESC)[email protected]" specifies the string "abcdefghi" where
the "def" portion appears in the channel 3 color (magenta) and the "ghi" portion
appears in the normal text color except it’s in inverse video.
2-202
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences. This consists of a
backslash followed by numerals in the standard C language printf fashion.
Another way to enter characters is \xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of
the character to display.
An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used.
Another advantage is it’s easy to access characters with the high bit set, that is,
those characters with a decimal value greater than 127.
An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a
single character (following "standard" Unix) as follows:
n newline (carriage return and linefeed)
\ backslash (\\ is required to get a backslash character)
j Japanese character encoding, the next two characters make one hexadecimal
JIS value as explained later
t horizontal tab; the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to as
explained earlier
u Unicode encoding, the next two characters make one hexadecimal Unicode
value as explained later
If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character, the backslash is
ignored and the character following it is accepted as is.
NOTE. The use of any escape codes other than those described above may
produce unpredictable results.
To specify Russian, Chinese, and Korean, use the 16 bit Unicode value characters
as shown in the example disk files. For additional information see The Unicode
Standard, Version 2.0. Only characters used in the oscilloscope are available.
Unicode values are represented in a quoted string as "\uxxyy" where xx and yy
are both hexadecimal values and xx and yy are concatenated to form a single
hexadecimal number. For example, "\u0413" is the Cyrillic capital letter GHE and
0413 is the Unicode value for that character. English and European characters can
also be specified using the \u Unicode sequence. In that case xx is simply 00 and
yy is the hexadecimal equivalent of the 8 bit character value.
To specify Japanese characters, use the 16 bit Japanese Interchange Standard (JIS
X 0208-1983) value. JIS values are represented in a quoted string as "\jxxyy"
where xx and yy are both hexadecimal values and xx and yy are concatenated
to form a single hexadecimal number.
Supported Unicode and JIS characters are shown in the CHARSETS directory of
the disk which accompanies this manual.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-203
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello world"displays "Hello world" in the upper left corner
of the box (you can define the box size with the MESSAGE BOX command).
hello" displays "Hello world ...
hello" in the upper left corner of the box and the word "world" is displayed in
inverse video. In this example, a ◄ stands for the escape character. The escape
character may appear differently for you depending on your controller program.
MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello ◄@world◄@ ...
MESSAGE:SHOW ’\x09\x00\xa0\[email protected] World\[email protected]\n\nYou
can display messages on your \033*\204\033)
oscilloscope\nusing any character or \033$color\033)
used by the\noscilloscope. \033!A \033"few
\033%examples \033#follow\033):\n\n\021\027\214\232
\340\341\342\343\344 \u042a\u042e\u042f\u3080\u3084
\u8017\n\n\033*\205\n\033%\206’ displays the message as shown below.
"Color" and "A few examples follow" are displayed in green, yellow, cyan, red,
and magenta respectively; Tek and Tektronix are also in Tektronix’ colors.
MESSage:STATE
Controls the display of the message window.
Group
Display
Syntax
MESSage:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
MESSage:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
MESSage:BOX, MESSage:SHOW
OFF or <NR1>= 0 removes the message window from the display.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 displays the message window and its contents on the display.
NEWpass (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) changes the password that enables access to
password protected data. The PASSWord command must be successfully executed
before using this command or an execution error will be generated.
2-204
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
NEWpass <QString>
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*PUD
<QString> is the new password, which can contain up to 16 characters.
NEWPASS "mypassword" creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing
your protected data.
*OPC
This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event
Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC
message are complete. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character "1" into the
output queue when all such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is
not available to read until all pending operations finish. For a complete discussion
of the use of these registers and the output queue, see Registers and Queues.
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument
with your application program. For more information, see Synchronization
Methods.
Table 2-36: Commands the Generate an OPC Message
Operation
Command
Single sequence acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE 1 (when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence)
Hard copy operation
HARDCopy START
Calibration step
Refer to the optional Service Manual.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPC
*OPC?
Related Commands
Examples
BUSY?, *WAI
*OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of
all pending OPC operations.
*OPC? might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-205
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*OPT? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns a list of the options installed in your instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPT?
Examples
*OPT? might return :3M:16 Meg Max 4M/CH
*PSC
This command sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the
automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When
*PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers
are set to 0 at power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER,
SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is
shut off and are restored at power-on.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*PSC <NR1>
*PSC?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE
<NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear
and allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on; any other value
sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear and
prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.
*PSC 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
*PSC? might return 1 to indicate that the power-on status clear flag is set to true.
*PUD
This command sets or returns a string of Protected User Data. This data is
protected by the PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering
the correct password. This password is not necessary to query the data.
2-206
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*PUD {<Block>|<QString>}
*PUD?
Arguments
<Block> is a block containing up to 300 characters.
<QString> is a string containing up to 300 characters.
Examples
*PUD #229This instrument belongs to me stores the string "This
instrument belongs to me" in the user protected data area.
*PUD? might return #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X
*RCL (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) restores the state of the instrument from a copy of
the settings stored in memory (The settings are stored using the *SAV command).
If ’factory’ is referenced (by specifying ’0’), the factory default values will be
restored.
This command is equivalent to RECAll:SETup and performs the same function as
selecting Recall from the File menu, and then pressing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*RCL <NR1>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 10. A value of 1 to 10, specifies a saved
setup storage location. Specifying a value of 0 causes the instrument factory
defaults to be restored. Using an out of range value causes an error (222, "Data
out of range").
*RCL 3 restores the instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory
location 3.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-207
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) returns stored or factory settings to the instrument
from a copy of the settings stored in memory. If factory is referenced (by
specifying ’0’), the factory default values will be restored. This command is
equivalent to *RCL and performs the same function as selecting Recall from the
File menu, and then choosing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<NR1>|<file path>}
Related Commands
Arguments
FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
FACtory restores the factory setup.
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 10. A value of 1 to 10, specifies a saved
setup storage location. Specifying a value of 0 causes the instrument factory
defaults to be restored. Using an out of range value causes an error (222, "Data
out of range").
<file path> specifies a location for an instrument setup file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you
do not specify them, the instrument will read the file from the default directory
(C:\TekScope\setups). <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128 characters
(use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported). Filename extensions
are not required, but highly recommended.
Examples
RECALL:SETUP FACTORY recalls (and makes current) the instrument setup to its
factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP 2 recalls the instrument setup from setup storage location 2.
RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET
in the default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups).
RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) recalls a stored waveform to a reference location.
This command is equivalent to selecting Recall from the File menu, and then
pressing the Waveform button.
Group
2-208
Save and Recall
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>
SAVe:WAVEform
REF<x> specifies a location in internal reference memory. Reference memory
location values range from 1 through 4.
<file path> specifies a location for a stored waveform file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If
you do not specify them, the instrument will read the waveform from the default
directory (C:\TekScope|Waveforms). <filename> stands for a filename of up
to 128 characters (use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported).
Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended.
Examples
RECALL:WAVEFORM "TEK00000.WFM",REF1 recalls the waveform stored
in the file named TEK00000.WFM from the default directory for waveforms
(C:\TekScope\Waveforms) to the reference location 1.
REF<x>:DATE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the date that a reference waveform was stored.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:DATE?
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
This command sets or returns the horizontal display position of the reference
waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from
the File menu, choosing Reference Setup¼ from the drop-down list, selecting a
reference waveform, and then entering the horizontal position value using the
multipurpose knob.
Group
Vertical
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-209
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> argument specifies the horizontal position of the specified reference
Examples
REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 0.0 positions the start of the Reference 2
waveform in percentage of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the
center vertical graticule. The range of this argument is from 0 through 100.
waveform at the center graticule.
REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return :REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50 indicating that the Reference 1 waveform is centered on the horizontal
graticule.
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
This command sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle?
REF<x>:TIMe? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the time that a reference waveform was stored.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:TIMe?
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or returns the vertical position of a reference waveform The
reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu, choosing Reference Setup from the drop-down list, selecting a reference
waveform, and then entering the Position value using the multipurpose knob.
2-210
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up,
and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. Position
adjusts only the display position of a waveform. The position value determines the
vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed. For example, if
the position for Reference 3 is set to 2.0, the signal represented by that reference
will be displayed at 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
NOTE. References are static. All position and scale changes are applied in a
post-processing mode.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?
Related Commands
CH<x>:POSition, MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition
Arguments
<NR3> is the desired position, in divisions from the center horizontal graticule.
Examples
REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 positions the Reference 2 input signal
The range is from -5 to 5 divisions.
1.3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule.
REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION? might return :REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION
-1.3000E+00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1.3 divisions
below the center horizontal graticule.
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or returns the vertical scale of a reference waveform. The
reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through
4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu, choosing Reference Setup from the drop-down list, selecting a reference
waveform, and then entering the Scale value using the multipurpose knob.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with constant
amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller.
Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-211
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects reference and math waveforms differently
from channel waveforms:
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display only,
graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition
hardware.
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition
window as well as the display scale. The range and resolution of scale
values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have
specified.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle
Arguments
<NR3> is the gain in user units per division.
Examples
REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per
division.
REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE? might return :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000e+00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is
1 V per division.
REM (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) embeds a comment within GPIB programs as a
means of internally documenting the programs. The instrument ignores these
embedded comment lines.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
REM <QString>
Related Commands
NEWpass, *PUD
Arguments
2-212
<QString> is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
REM "This is a comment" is a comment string that the instrument will ignore.
*RST (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the factory default
settings. The *RST command does not alter the following:
The state of the IEEE Std 488.1-1987 interface
The selected IEEE Std 488.1-1987 address of the instrument
Calibration data that affect device specifications
The Output Queue
The Service Request Enable Register setting
The Power-on status clear flag setting
Alias definitions
Stored settings
The *PUD? Response
Any of the values associated with the DATA command.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button on the
front panel.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*RST
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
None
*RST resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.
*SAV (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a specified
memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the instrument
to this saved state. \
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-213
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, and then
pressing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
*SAV <NR1>
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
<NR1> specifies a location in which to save the state of the instrument. Location
values range from 1 through 10. Using an out-of-range location value causes an
execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
will be overwritten.
*SAV 2 saves the current instrument state in memory location 2.
SAVe:IMAGe (No Query Form)
Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file. Supported image
formats are PNG, Windows Bitmap and TIFF. If an extension for a supported file
type is added to the file name, then the corresponding format will be used. If no
supported extension is added to the file, the format to use will be determined by
the value obtained from the :SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat? query.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:IMAGe <file path>
Arguments
<file path> is a filename, including path, where the image will be saved.
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat
Sets the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot
be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by
using the front panel.
Group
2-214
Save and Recall
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|TIFf}
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat?
PNG saves the file in the Portable Network Graphics format.
BMP saves the file in the Windows bitmap format.
TIFf saves the file in the Tag Image File Format.
SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a specified
memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the instrument
to this saved state. This is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu,
and then pressing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:SETUp {<file path>|<NR1>}
Related Commands
Arguments
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV
<file path> is the target location for storing the setup file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>:<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you
do not specify them, the instrument will store the file in the default directory
(C:\TekScope\setups). <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128 characters.
(Use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported.) Filename extensions
are not required but are highly recommended. For setups, use the extension
".SET".
<NR1> specifies a location for saving the current front-panel setup. The
front-panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10. Using an out-of-range value causes
an execution error. Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
will be overwritten.
Examples
SAVE:SETUP 5 saves the current instrument setup in memory location 5.
SAVE:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" saves the current instrument setup in the file
TEK00000.SET in the default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups).
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-215
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) saves a waveform to one of four reference
memory locations or a file. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference
Waveforms from the File menu and choosing Save Wfm from the drop-down list.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{<file path>|REF<x>}
Related Commands
Arguments
RECAll:WAVEform
<wfm> is the waveform that will be saved. Valid waveforms include CH<x>,
MATH<y>, and REF<x>.
REF<x> specifies the location in internal reference memory to where the
waveform is stored.
<file path> is the location to where the waveform is stored. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If
you do not specify them, the instrument will read the waveform from the default
directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 125 characters, followed by
a period (".") and the three-character extension. Internal format waveforms use
the .wfm extension for spreadsheet format files or the .dat extension for MathCad
format files. The instrument will generate an error if you use any other extension
for saving a waveform.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH2,REF2 saves the Math2 waveform in reference memory
location2.
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,"TEK0000.WFM" saves the Math1 waveform to the
file TEK00000.WFM in the default directory and on the default drive.
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
This command specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms. Waveform
header and timing information is included in the resulting file of non-internal
formats. The instrument saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix, with the
first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data. The values specified by
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP determine the range of waveform data to output.
In the event that DATa:STOP value is greater than the current record length, the
current record length determines the last output value.
2-216
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, clicking
the Waveform button, and choosing the desired waveform file format from the
Save as type drop-down list.
Group
Save and Recall
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|MATHCad|SPREADSheet}
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
Related Commands
Arguments
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
INTERNal specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format, using a .wfm
filename extension. These files can be recalled as reference waveforms. When this
argument is specified, the settings specified via the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP
commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved.
MATHCad specifies that waveforms are saved in MathCad format, using a .dat
filename extension. When saving in this format, waveform values are delimited
with new lines. MathCad format enables easy import of waveform data into
MathCad or MATLAB. For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For
these formats, waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate
header file. MathCad format header files use a _hdr.dat extension.
MATLab specifies that waveforms are saved in Matlab format, using a .dat filename
extension. When saving in this format, waveform values are delimited with new
lines. MATLAB format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad
or MATLAB. For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For these
formats, waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate header
file. MATLAB format header files use a _hdr.dat extension.
SPREADSHEETCsv specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains
comma delimited values. These waveform data files are named using the .csv
filename extension. Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet
programs to import the data.
SPREADSHEETTxt specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains
tab delimited values. These waveform data files are named using the .txt filename
extension. Saving waveforms in this format enables spreadsheet programs to
import the data.
Examples
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format
is the format used for saving waveforms.
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return :SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-217
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy (No Query Form)
This command copies the search criteria to the trigger, or the trigger criteria to
the search.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy {SEARCHtotrigger|TRIGgertosearch|UNDo}
Arguments
SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger
TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search
UNDo undoes the last copy.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE
This command sets the search state to on or off and the query form returns the
search state. The returned value is either 0 or 1 for OFF and ON, respectively.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE?
Arguments
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the search state to off.
ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 sets the search state to on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? (Query Only)
This query-only returns the total amount of matches for this search, which may be
more than the number of marks placed if the mark limit has been exceeded.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?
Returns
2-218
<NR1> is the total number of matches.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS
This command sets or queries the serial search type. There are two serial buses
B1 and B2. Each can be independently set to one of three serial search types:
I2C, CAN or SPI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS {I2C|SPI|CAN}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS?
Arguments
I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.
CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for CAN search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|EOF|ACKMISS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?
Arguments
SOF specifies a search based on start of frame.
FRAMEtype specifies a search based on frame type.
IDentifier specifies a search based on frame identifier.
DATA specifies a search based on frame data
IDANDDATA specifies a search based on frame identifier and data.
EOF specifies end of frame.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing the ACK field.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-219
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the CAN search condition to be valid on a READ,
WRITE or either. This only applies if the search condition is IDentifier.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ specifies a read condition.
WRITE specifies a write condition.
NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the CAN data qualifier. This only applies if the
trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
LESSThan specifies to search for bus data is less than the specified value specified
by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
MOREThan specifies to search for bus data is more than the specified value
specified by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
EQUal specifies to search for bus data is equal to the specified value specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
2-220
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
UNEQual specifies to search for bus data is not equal to the specified value
specified by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
CAN search, if search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for CAN search if
search condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?
Related Commands
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets or queries the CAN Frame Type to be used if the search
condition is FrameType.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-221
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATA|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?
Arguments
DATA specifies a data frame.
REMote specifies a remote frame.
ERRor specifies an error frame.
OVERLoad specifies an overload frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
This command sets or queries the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended
format.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe {STandard|EXTended}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe?
Arguments
STandard specifies an 11-bit identifier field.
EXTended specifies a 29-bit identifier field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string to be used for CAN search
if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
2-222
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the address in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-Bit.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
{ADDR7|ADDR10}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?
Arguments
ADDR7 specifies 7-bit addresses.
ADDR10 specifies 10-bit addresses.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
This command sets or queries the I2C address type to I2C special addresses
(General Call, HS Mode etc.), or to a user-specified address.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
{GENeralcall|STARtbyte|HSmode|EEPROM|USER}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-223
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
GENeralcall specifies a general call address.
STARtbyte specifies a start byte address.
HSmode specifies a high-speed mode address.
EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address.
USER specifies a user address.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string to be used for I2C search
if search condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the address in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for I2C search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATA|ADDRANDDATA}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?
Arguments
STARt specifies a search based on start condition.
STOP specifies a search based on stop condition.
REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition.
2-224
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ADDRess specifies a search based on address.
DATA specifies a search based on data.
ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the I2C search condition to be valid on a READ,
WRITE or either.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ specifies a read condition.
WRITE specifies a write condition.
NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
I2C search, if search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-225
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for I2C search if
search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for SPI search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
{SS|MISO|MOSI|MISOMOSI}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?
Arguments
SS specifies the Slave Selection condition
MISO specifies the Master-In Slave-Out condition.
MOSI specifies the Master-Out Slave-In condition.
MISOMOSI specifies the Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out Slave-In conditions.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search if
search condition is MISO, MISOMOSI.
Conditions
2-226
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:
VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:
VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string to be used for SPI search if
search condition is MOSI, or MISOMOSI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:
VALue <bin>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:
VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the data in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
SPI search, if search condition is MISO, MOSI or MISOMOSI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR1> is the data string length in bytes.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-227
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the bus for a serial search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce {B1|B2}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?
Arguments
B1 specifies the bus 1 source.
B2 specifies the bus 2 source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or returns the slope for an edge search to determine where
to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
Arguments
RISe specifies a rising edge.
FALL specifies a falling edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search to
determine where to place a mark.
2-228
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel
This command sets or queries the level for an edge search to determine where
to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level, in volts.
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the level for edge search for the selected channel to
determine where to place a mark. Each channel can have an independent level.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level, in volts.
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH
This command sets or queries the math waveform level for edge search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-229
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH?
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the reference waveform level for edge search to
determine where to place a mark
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the logic operator for the logic search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Arguments
AND specifies to place a mark if all conditions are true.
NANd specifies to place a mark if any of the conditions are false.
NOR specifies to place a mark if all conditions are false.
OR specifies to place a mark if any of the conditions are true.
2-230
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don’t care" state.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or queries whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic
search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
{FALL|RISe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
RISe specifies a rising edge.
FALL specifies a falling edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the clock source definition for logic search. If a
clock source is defined, then the logic search is determined by the state of the
other inputs at the clock transition. If no clock source is defined, then the logic
search is determined only by the state of the inputs.
Group
Search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-231
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?
CH<x> specifies a channel input as the clock source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3, or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH
This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don’t care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don’t care” condition.
2-232
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don’t care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH
This command sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:MATH?
Arguments
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don’t care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
This command sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-233
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:REF<x>?
HIGH specifies a high logic level.
LOW specifies a low logic level.
X specifies a “don’t care” condition.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
This command sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
Arguments
TRUe argument sets the instrument to place a mark when the pattern becomes true.
FALSe argument sets the instrument to place a mark when the pattern becomes
false.
LESSThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is
true less than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command.
MOREThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is
true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:
A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit command.
EQUal argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is
true longer than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command, but less than the specified time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
command.
UNEQual argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the specific pattern is
true less than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command, or longer than the specified time set by
the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
command.
2-234
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
This command sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be
true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
This command sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be
true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the channel threshold level for an edge search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
{<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the trigger level, in volts.
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-235
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH
This command sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for edge search
to determine where to place a mark
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH?
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x>
This command sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for edge
search to determine where to place a mark
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
2-236
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH
This command sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:MATH?
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>
This command sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a –1.3 V trigger level.
TTL specifies a 1.4 V trigger level.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search to determine where
to place a mark.
Group
Search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-237
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
{NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?
POSITIVe specifies that the instrument will only place a mark when the polarity
of the pulse is positive.
NEGative specifies that the instrument will only place a mark when the polarity
of the pulse is negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse width search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?
Arguments
2-238
LESSThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is less
than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MOREThan argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is true
longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
EQUal argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is equal
to the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
command within a tolerance of ±5%.
UNEQual argument sets the instrument to place a mark if the pulse width is
unequal to the time the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WIDth command within a tolerance of ±5%.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
This command sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth?
Arguments
<NR3> is the pulse width.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge re-crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge re-crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the
low threshold.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-239
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
EITher finds on a runt of either polarity.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source setting for a runt search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
This command sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?
Arguments
OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.
LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width less than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth command.
MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width more than the time set by the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth command.
EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time
period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
2-240
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a
time period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
This command sets or returns the width setting for a runt search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup/hold search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup/hold search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-241
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup/hold search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
{<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the data source setting for an setup/hold search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
2-242
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup/hold search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
{<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command sets or returns the hold time setting for an setup/hold search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
This command sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup/hold search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-243
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
This command sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition search
to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
<NR3>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the transition time, in seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur.
NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source setting for an transition search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
2-244
Search
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce?
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
This command sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search to
determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
{SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn?
Arguments
FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set
volts/second rate.
SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than
the set volts/second rate.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set
volts/second rate within a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to
the set volts/second rate ±5%.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
This command sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine
where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
{EDGe|SETHold|PULSEWidth|RUNt|TRANsition}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-245
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The thresholds are
set with the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> commands.
PULSEWIdth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified
polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit.
The polarity is selected using the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity command.
TRANsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH
This command sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:MATH?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
2-246
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x>
This command sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold level for a
transition search to determine where to place a mark.
Group
Search
Syntax
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x> {ECL|TTL}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
SELect? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the selected waveform that is affected by the
front-panel controls and the display status (on or off) of all waveforms. This query
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu
and viewing the Source waveform setting.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect?
Examples
SELECT? might return the waveform and status information as :SELECT:CH1
1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0; MATH2 0;MATH3 0;MATH4 0;REF1
0;REF2 0; REF3 0;REF4 0;CONTROL CH1
SELect:BUS<x>
This command turns on the display of the specified Bus waveform and also resets
the acquisition. The query returns whether the specified Bus waveform is on or
off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform. The value of <x>
can be 1 or 2.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:BUS<x> {<NR1>|OFF|ON}
SELect:BUS<x>?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-247
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:BUS1 ON turns the Bus 1 waveform display on, and selects it.
SELECT:BUS1? might return :SELECT:BUS1 1 indicating that Bus 1 waveform
is being displayed.
SELect:CH<x>
This command turns on the display of a specified waveform and also resets the
acquisition. The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not
indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:CH<x> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:CH<x>?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects channel 2.
SELECT:CH1? might return :SELECT:CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being
displayed.
SELect:CONTROl <wfm>
This command sets or returns the waveform that is selected as the implied
recipient of channel-related commands that support legacy-style programs. The
command form also performs the equivalent of a SELect:CH<x> ON command.
This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu and either viewing or setting the Source waveform.
2-248
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:CONTROl {CH<x>|MATH}
SELect:CONTROl?
Arguments
CH<x> selects the specified channel waveform as the waveform that is affected by
the front-panel controls. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging
from 1 through 4 for 4-channel models and 1 to 2 for 2-channel models.
MATH selects the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the
front-panel controls.
Examples
SELECT:CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2, and causes the
selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands.
SELECT:CONTROL? might return :SELECT:CONTROL MATH indicating that math
is the implied object of waveform commands.
SELect:MATH[1]
This command turns on the display of the math waveform and also resets the
acquisition. The query returns whether the math waveform is on or off but does
not indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:MATH[1] {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:MATH[1]?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:MATH ON turns the math waveform display on, and selects it.
SELECT:MATH? might return :SELECT:MATH 1 indicating that the math
waveform is being displayed.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-249
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SELect:REF<x>
This command turns on the display of a specified reference waveform and also
resets the acquisition. The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does
not indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect:REF<x> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
SELect:REF<x>?
Arguments
ON turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform also becomes
the selected waveform.
OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform.
<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value turns
on the display of the specified waveform.
Examples
SELECT:REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects reference
waveform 2.
SELECT:REF3? might return :SELECT:REF3 1 indicating that reference
waveform 3 is being displayed.
SET? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings,
except for configuration information for the calibration values. You can use these
commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET?
query. The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless of the setting
of the HEADer command. This is because the returned commands are intended
to be sent back to the instrument as a command string. The VERBose command
can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated
or full-length.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
SET?
Related Commands
2-250
HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
SET? might return the following response: :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT
236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE
RUNNING;WINDOW FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE
FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE
INTERNAL;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK
1;COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR
DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE
FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT 1;SCREENSAVER
1;SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3;:HARDCOPY:FILENAME "untitled";PORT
FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE
EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;
*SRE
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits in the
Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*SRE <NR1>
*SRE?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *STB?
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the SRER
are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error. The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
*SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.
*SRE might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value
of 00100000.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-251
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
STArtuptime? (Query Only)
Returns the time that the oscilloscope was last powered on.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
STArtuptime?
*STB? (Query Only)
The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte
Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For more
information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*STB?
Related Commands
Returns
Examples
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *SRE
<NR1>
*STB? might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000.
TEKSecure (No Query Form)
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories, overwriting any
previously stored data.
TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on the hard drive, if
they exist, and puts all setups in the factory-initialized state. External setups that
are stored on the hard drive are not affected.
2-252
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TEKSecure
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories.
TIME
This command sets or returns the time that the instrument displays. This command
is equivalent to selecting Set Time & Date from the Utilities menu and then setting
the fields in the Time group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TIME <QString>
TIME?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATE
<QString> is a time in the form "hh:mm:ss" where hh refers to a two-digit hour
number, mm refers to a two-digit minute number from 01 to 60, and ss refers to a
two-digit second number from 01 to 60.
TIME "14:00:00" sets the time to exactly 2:00 p.m.
TIME? might return :TIME "14:05:17 indicating the current time is set to 2:05
p.m. and 17 seconds.
TOTaluptime? (Query Only)
This command returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been
turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed (usually since the
initial manufacturing process).
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TOTaluptime?
*TRG (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) performs the group execute trigger on commands
defined by *DDT.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-253
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TRG
Related Commands
Examples
*DDT
*TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.
TRIGger (No Query Form)
This command forces a trigger event to occur.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger FORCe
Arguments
Examples
FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition
will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to
selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then clicking
Force Trigger.
TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur.
TRIGger:A
This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal. The query returns
current A trigger parameters. The trigger level is the voltage threshold through
which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event. This
command is equivalent to pushing the LEVEL knob on the front panel.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A SETLevel
TRIGger:A?
Related Commands
2-254
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, TRIGger:A:PULse?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and
Examples
TRIGGER:A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the
maximum values of the trigger input signal.
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGGER:A? might return the following A trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY
DEFAULT;TIME 1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2
1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT
5.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD
1.2000;SOURCE CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME
2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE;WHEN
OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3
HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4
HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2
1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED;SCAN RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE
1;POLARITY NORMAL;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD
NTSC;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD CUSTOM;CODE
NRZ;BITRATE 1544000;AMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
0.0000;LOW 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-255
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE CH1;SOURCE:TYPE DATA
TRIGger:A:BUS
This command sets or queries the serial trigger type: I2C, CAN or SPI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS {I2C|SPI|CAN}
TRIGger:A:BUS?
Arguments
I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.
CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
This command sets or returns the CAN condition.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|EOF|ACKMISS}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?
Arguments
SOF enables triggering on the start of frame.
FRAME enables triggering on the type of frame.
IDENTIFIER enables triggering on a matching identifier.
DATA enables triggering on matching data.
IDENTANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data.
EOF enables triggering on the end of frame.
2-256
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ACKMISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge.
ERROR enables triggering on an error within a frame.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION? might return :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:
CAN:CONDITION EOF indication an end of file condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching
CAN data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the CAN trigger condition to be valid on a READ,
WRITE, or either. This only applies if the trigger condition is ID.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ sets the CAN data direction to READ.
WRITEsets the CAN data direction to WRITE..
NOCAREsets the CAN data direction to either.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data
direction to Write.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or returns the CAN data qualifier. This only applies if the
trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-257
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
CAN trigger, if trigger condition is DATA or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR3> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger if
trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is the CAN data value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets or queries the CAN trigger frame type.
2-258
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATA|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?
Arguments
DATA specifies a data frame type.
REMOTE specifies a remote frame type.
ERROR specifies an error frame type.
OVERLOAD specifies an overload frame type.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type
to DATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
This command sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended
format.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe
{STandard|EXTended}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe?
Arguments
STandard specifies the standard addressing mode.
EXTended specifies the extended addressing mode.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the CAN trigger
if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-259
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is up to 29 bits specifying the CAN identifier value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger
identifier value to 1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command sets or queries the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?
Arguments
ADDR7 specifies the 7-bit I2C address mode.
ADDR10 specifies the 10-bit I2C address mode.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode
to 10-bit.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
This command sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C special addresses
(general call, HS-mode etc.), or to a user-specified address.
Conditions
Group
2-260
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe
{GENeralcall|STARtbyte|HSmode|EEPROM|USER}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe?
GENeralcall specifies a general call address.
STARtbyte specifies a start byte address.
HSmode specifies a high-speed mode address.
EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address.
USER specifies a user address.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if
the trigger condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is up to 7 or 10-bits depending on the address mode that specifies the
address.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value
to 1011.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
This command sets or returns the trigger condition for I2C trigger.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-261
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATA|ADDRANDDATA}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?
STARt specifies a search based on start condition.
STOP specifies a search based on stop condition.
REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition.
ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition.
ADDRess specifies a search based on address.
DATA specifies a search based on data.
ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger
condition.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the I2C trigger condition valid on a READ, WRITE,
or either. The read or write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?
Arguments
READ specifies read as the data direction.
WRITE specifies write as the data direction.
NOCARE specifies either as the data direction.
Examples
2-262
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the
I2C data direction.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR3> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the
trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <bin>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe command.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for SPI triggering.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-263
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition {SS|MISO|MOSI|MISOMOSI}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?
SS specifies the Slave Selection condition
MISO specifies the Master-In Slave-Out condition.
MOSI specifies the Master-Out Slave-In condition.
MISOMOSI specifies the Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out Slave-In conditions.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue
This command sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger if
trigger condition is MISO, MISOMOSI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue <bin>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:VALue?
Arguments
<bin> is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe command.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for the SPI trigger if the
trigger condition is set to MISO or MISOMOSI.
Conditions
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue <bin>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue?
Arguments
2-264
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
<bin> is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for
SPI trigger, if trigger condition is MISO, MOSI or MISOMOSI.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR3>
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?
Arguments
<NR3> is the length of the data string in bytes.
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the bus for a serial search.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce {B1|B2}
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?
Arguments
B1 specifies the bus 1 source.
B2 specifies the bus 2 source.
TRIGger:A:EDGE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the
A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Edge Setup from the Trig
menu and viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-265
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:PULse?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
TRIGGER:A:EDGE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC; SLOPE RISE indicating the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A
edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
This command sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig
menu, selecting Edge Trigger, and choosing from the Coupling drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling {AC|DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
AC selects AC trigger coupling, which passes the input signals above 60 Hz to the
trigger circuitry.
DC selects DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the trigger
circuitry.
HFRej coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
LFRej coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
NOISErej coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis.
Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but may require greater
trigger signal amplitude.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING
DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.
2-266
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
then choosing the desired Slope.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which
triggers on the rising edge of the signal.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
then choosing from the Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>|EXT|LINE}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
located on the rear panel of the instrument.
LINE specifies AC line voltage.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-267
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the A trigger holdoff parameters. These
parameters specify the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking
to generate a trigger event. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
900.0000E-09;BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time
(by default) is 900 ns.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
This command sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time. This command is
equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired
Trig Holdoff.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from 250 ns through
12.0 s.
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME
1.2000E-06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1.2 µs.
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.
2-268
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LEVel
This command sets or returns the level for the A trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Level from the Trig menu and then viewing or setting
the trigger Level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
Arguments
ECL specifies the ECL high level.
TTL specifies the TTL high level.
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVel 1.3000E+00
indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V.
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level, which is 1.4 V.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the level for the specified channel. Each Channel
can have an independent Level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies the ECL high level.
TTL specifies the TTL high level.
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2
1.3000E+00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V for channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for
channel 3.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-269
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns all of the A logic trigger parameters.
This command is provided for backward compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;
FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE; THRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 1.4000;CH3
1.4000; CH4 1.4000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X;CH3 X; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;
WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9; MORELIMIT
5.0000E-9; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE; THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH1; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME2.0000E-9; SETTIME
3.0000E-9; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
This command sets or returns the class of the Logic Trigger. Used in conjunction
with the TRIGger:A:TYPe command, this command is equivalent to selecting
Logic Pattern, Logic State or Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu. This
command is provided for backward compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss {PATtern|STATE|SETHold}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
Related Commands
2-270
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
PATtern sets the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations
of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met on four-channel instruments. On two-channel
instruments, only channel 1 and channel 2 are available.
STATE sets the instrument to trigger when the specified conditions of channels
1, 2, and 3 are met after the channel 4 (clock) condition is met on four-channel
instruments. On two-channel instruments, only channel 1 and channel 2 (clock)
are available.
SETHold sets the instrument to trigger on setup and hold violations between a
data source and a clock source. Use one channel input as the clock signal and a
second channel input as the data input. The clocking and data levels are used to
determine if a clock or data transition has occurred.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
PATTERN
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN sets the trigger A logic class to PATtern,
which causes the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the
A pattern and A state logic triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting A
Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern or State for the
Trigger Type, and setting or viewing the Pattern Type. This command is provided
for backward compatibility with other Tektronix instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.
NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.
NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.
OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-271
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
NAND
which indicates that the instrument will trigger if the AND logic conditions are
false.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to
be true when all conditions are true.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? (Query Only)
On four-channel instruments, this query-only command returns the A logic trigger
input expected for channel 1, 2, and 3. Channel 4 is set or queried with the
command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
On two-channel instruments, this query returns the A logic trigger input
expected for channel 1. Channel 2 is set or queried with the command
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup and
viewing or setting the Input Threshold for channel 1 through 3 for four-channel
instruments or channel 1 for two-channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while
channel 2 and channel three are “don’t care.”
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the A logical input for the logic trigger
channel specified by x. The value of x ranges from 1 through 3 for
four-channel instruments. For two-channel instruments x can only be
1. Note that CH4 on four-channel instruments or CH2 on two-channel
instruments cannot be set or queried with this command. For details
about setting this channel, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 or
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2. This command is equivalent to selecting
A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired
2-272
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
logical input from the Ch<x> drop-down list, which is located in the Input
Threshold group box.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don’t care" state.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<x>? might return
:TRIGGER:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X indicating that the setting for
the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not matter.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<x> HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic
HIGH for channel 2.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets the polarity of the clock channel.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns channel to use as the clock source. The Clock can be selected as
’NONE’. A selection of none implies pattern trigger. Any other selection implies
state trigger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-273
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|NONE}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments.
NONE specifies a Pattern trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the conditions used for generating an A
logic pattern trigger, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the
maximum and minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still
generate the trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:MORELimit
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE; WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
This command sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 2 in
two-channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value used
when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the
desired logical input from the Ch2 drop-down list, which is located in the Input
Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a four-channel instrument, see
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
2-274
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Conditions
This command applies to two-channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don’t care" state.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH2 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input
to logic high for channel 2 when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the
threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 2 input to the selected
function.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH2? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH2 HIGH indicating that
the logic input for channel 2 is logic high.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
This command sets or returns the A logic trigger input for channel 4 in
four-channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value used
when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the
desired logical input from the Ch4 drop-down list, which is located in the Input
Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a two-channel instrument, see
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
Conditions
Group
This command applies to four-channel instruments.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-275
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 {HIGH|LOW|X}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
HIGH specifies the logic high.
LOW specifies the logic low.
X specifies a "don’t care" state.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input
to logic high for channel 4 when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the
threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 4 input to the selected
function.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 HIGH indicating that
the logic input for channel 4 is logic high.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
This command sets or returns the condition for generating an A logic pattern
trigger with respect to the defined input pattern. This command is equivalent to
selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern for
Trigger Type, and choosing a trigger condition from the Pattern drop-down list,
which is located in the Trigger When group box.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan|EQUal|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?, TRIGger:
A:LOGIc:THReshold?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
TRUe argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes true.
FALSe argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes false.
2-276
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
LESSThan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is true less
than the time set by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command.
MOREThan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is true
longer than the specified time set by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
MORELimit command.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN FALSE specifies to trigger the A logic
pattern when the pattern becomes false.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE indicating that the
A logic pattern will trigger when the pattern becomes true.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
This command sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be
true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as
the Trigger Type, selecting Less Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings,
and entering a maximum value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
<NR3> specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 10.0E+00 sets the
maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true (and generate an A logic
pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-09 indicating
that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 5 ns and still generate an A logic
pattern trigger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-277
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
This command sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be
true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern
as the Trigger Type, selecting More Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When
settings, and entering a minimum value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
<NR3> specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 10.0E+00 sets the minimum
time that the selected pattern may hold true (and generate an A logic pattern
trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 5.0000E-09 indicating
that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 5 ns to generate an A logic
pattern trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments.
See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and
hold input. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce command.
2-278
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and
hold trigger. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger.
This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments.
See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-279
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
ECL specifies the preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the setup and hold data level, in V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset ECL
high level of 1.4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00 indicating
that 1.2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments.
See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
This command sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation
triggering. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the threshold voltage for all channels in an A
logic trigger. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:LEVel command
Group
2-280
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the A logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel,
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. See the TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
command
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected. Each
channel can have an independent level. Used in runt and slew rate as the lower
threshold. Used for all other trigger types as the single level/threshold.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 50E-3 sets the lower limit of the pulse
runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:
LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.2000E-01 indicating that the lower limit of the pulse
runt trigger is set to 120 mV.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-281
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:MODe
This command sets or returns the A trigger mode. This command is equivalent to
selecting Mode from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Trigger Mode.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}
TRIGger:A:MODe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LEVel
AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period.
NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before
a trigger is generated.
TRIGGER:A:MODE? might return :TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL indicating that a
valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated.
TRIGger:A:PULse? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the A pulse trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Related Commands
Examples
2-282
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
TRIGGER:A:PULSE? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH;SOURCE CH1; GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9; TRIGIF
ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE; THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS; WIDTH 2.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY
POSITIVE; THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN; POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
This command sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting the setup menu for the pulse type that you want from the
Trig menu: Width Setup, Runt Setup, or Transition Setup.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss {RUNt|WIDth|TRANsition}
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:RUNT?, TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?, TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}?, TRIGger:A:TYPe
RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but
does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The
thresholds are set with the TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW and
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH commands.
WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either
inside or outside the limits as specified by TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit. The polarity is selected using the
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity command.
TRANsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger.
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH
indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:HIGHLimit
This command sets or returns the upper limit for the runt trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-283
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOWLimit
This command sets or returns the lower limit for the runt trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOWLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce command.
2-284
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:SOUrce
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for the runt
trigger. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
This command sets or returns the upper limit for the runt trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
This command sets or returns the lower limit for the A pulse runt trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
This command sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when
it detects a runt. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn command.
Group
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-285
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
This command sets or returns the minimum width for a runt trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
<NR3> specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6 sets the minimum width of the pulse
runt trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH? might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 2.0000E-09 indicating that
the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:DELTatime
This command sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value
for the transition trigger. This command is provided for compatibility with other
Tektronix instruments. See the TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:DELTatime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:DELTatime?
Related Commands
2-286
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:POLarity, TRIGger:A:PULse{:
TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:HIGHLimit
This command sets or returns the upper (most positive) transition trigger
threshold. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:LOWLimit
This command sets or returns the lower (most negative) transition trigger
threshold. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:LOWLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:POLarity?
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for transition trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce command.
Group
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-287
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the upper and lower threshold limits for the
transition time trigger. This command is provided for compatibility with other
Tektronix instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSE{:TRANSITION|:SLEWRATE}:THRESHOLD? might
return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3 indicating the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition
time trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold:HIGH
This command sets or returns the upper (most positive) transition trigger
threshold. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold:LOW
This command sets or returns the lower (most negative) transition trigger
threshold. This command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix
instruments. See the TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> command.
2-288
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:THReshold:LOW
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:WHEn
This command sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that
is faster or slower than the specified delta time. This is equivalent to selecting
Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Trigger When Transition
Time setting.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:WHEn
{FASTer|SLOWer|EQUal|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:WHEn?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
This command sets or returns the upper limit for the width trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LEVel
This command sets or returns the threshold for the pulse width trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LEVel
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
This command sets or returns the lower limit for the width trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-289
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|LINE|EXT}
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
located on the rear panel of the instrument.
LINE specifies AC line voltage.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width
source.
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:
WIDTH:SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source.
2-290
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
This command sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse width that
falls outside (or within) the specified range of limits. This command
is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WIDth
This commands sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger. This
command is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. See the
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9; HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN; POLARITY
POSITIVE as the current A width trigger parameters.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger.
Group
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-291
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?
NEGative specifies a negative pulse.
POSitive specifies a positive pulse.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to
negative.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY? might return
:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger..
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|LINE|EXT}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
located on the rear panel of the instrument.
LINE specifies AC line voltage.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width
source.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse width that falls outside
(or within) the specified range of limits.
2-292
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
command.
MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width more than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
command.
EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time
period equal to the time period specified in TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
within a ±5% tolerance.
NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a
time period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the duration of the
A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
WHEN MORETHAN indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
This commands sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth?
Arguments
<NR3> specifies the pulse width in seconds.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-293
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 5.0E-6 sets the pulse width to 5 µs.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:
WIDTH 2.0000E-9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:RUNT? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current A runt trigger parameters. This
command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then
viewing the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT? might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2 X; CH3 X;
CH4 LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH11.2000; CH2
1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE :THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000; LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the
Polarity setting.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge re-crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge re-crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the
low threshold.
2-294
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A
pulse runt trigger is negative.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels, which range from 1 through 4 for
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse
four-channel instruments and 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
trigger.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2
indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
This command sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when
it detects a runt.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?
Arguments
OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.
LESSthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
command.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-295
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
MOREthan argument sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected
with width more than the time set by the TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
command.
EQUal argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a time
period equal to the time period specified in TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
within a ±5% tolerance.
NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern is true for a
time period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN MORETHAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the
instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument detects a runt of
any detectable width.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
This command sets or returns the minimum width for a runt trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt
trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:SETHold? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold and
source input; data voltage threshold and source; and both setup and hold times
for setup and hold violation triggering.
Group
2-296
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
TRIGger:A:SETHold?
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD? might return the settings
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE; THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH2; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD :HOLDTIME
2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold and
source input for setup and hold triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:
CLOCk:SOUrce
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE;
THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2 indicating the current clock settings for
setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-297
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock
rising edge.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE? might return :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:
CLOCK:EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified as the clock rising edge.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and
hold input.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|EXT}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
located on the rear panel of the instrument.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the A logic
setup and hold input.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:
CLOCK:SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup
and hold input. For the A logic trigger.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold
trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
2-298
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value
of 1.4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00
indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1.2 V.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the voltage threshold and data source for the
setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup
from the Trig menu and then viewing the current data setups.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH1 indicating
the current trigger data settings.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|EXT}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
EXT specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector
located on the rear panel of the instrument.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-299
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the clock source
for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is
the current clock source for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
ECL specifies the preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the setup and hold data level, in V.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset ECL high
level of 1.4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00 indicating
that 1.2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Arguments
2-300
<NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 3.0E-3 sets the hold time for the setup and
hold trigger to 3 ms.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that
the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
This command sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 3.0E-6 specifies that the current setup time
for setup and hold trigger is 3 µs.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09
indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns transition time trigger parameters. This
command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then
viewing the current transition settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?
Examples
TRIGGER:A::TRANSITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN
indicating the current transition time trigger settings.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-301
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime
This command sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition
value for the transition trigger. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the Time.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime <NR3>
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> specifies the delta time, in seconds.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 15E-6 sets the delta time of the
transition trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME? might return :TRIGGER:A
:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the delta time of the
transition trigger is set to 2 ns.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity
{EITher|NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur.
NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive)
to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity.
Examples
2-302
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to
negative.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY? might return :TRIGGER:A:
TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either
positive or negative.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for transition trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce?
Arguments
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels, which range from 1 through 4 for
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the
four-channel instruments and 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
transition trigger.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:
SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger.
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
This command sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is
faster or slower than the specified delta time.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn
{SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual}
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn?
Arguments
FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set
volts/second rate.
SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than
the set volts/second rate.
EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set
volts/second rate within a ±5% tolerance.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-303
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to
the set volts/second rate ±5%.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN sets the trigger to occur when
the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts/second rate.
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN? might return :TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:
WHEN FASTERTHAN indicating that the transition triggers when the transitioning
signal is faster than the set volts/second rate.
TRIGger:A:TYPe
This command sets or returns the type of A trigger. The five types of triggers
are of Edge, Logic, Pulse, Serial, and Video. Logic and Pulse triggers contain
classes. Logic triggers consist of State, Pattern, and SetHold classes; Pulse
triggers consist of Runt, Width, and Transition. Once you have set the trigger
type, you may also need to identify the associated trigger class. For details on
selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss and
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss respectively. This command is similar to selecting A
Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then selecting the desired
Trigger Type.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGe|LOGic|PULSe|SERial|VIDeo}
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
EDGe is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through
a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the
TRIGger:A:EDGE? commands.
LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is
controlled by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc? commands.
PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is
controlled by the TRIGger:A:PULse? commands.
SERial specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is found.
Supports AMI, HDB3, B3ZS, B6ZS, B8ZS, CMI, MLT3, Manchester, and NRZ
encoded communications signals.
VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found.
2-304
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE.
TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE PULSE indicating that the
A trigger type is a pulse trigger.
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets the upper threshold for the channel selected. Each channel can
have an independent level. Used for the following trigger types: runt, slew rate.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 50E-3 sets the upper limit of the pulse
runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:
UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.2000E-01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse
runt trigger is set to 120 mV.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the A trigger video parameters.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED; SCAN RATE1; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS;
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-305
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
HOLDOFF:FIELD 1.0000;TIME 20.0000E-3; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE
1;SCAN RATE1; SOURCE CH1;STANDARD NTSC.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the A trigger custom video parameters.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM? might return the parameters
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED; SCAN
RATE1.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPE}
This command sets or returns the video trigger format. Use this command only
when the video format is set to custom.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPE}
{INTERLAced|PROGressive}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPE}?
Arguments
INTERLAced argument sets the format for interlaced video lines.
PROGressive argument sets the format for progressive video lines.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT PROGRESSIVE sets the custom format for
the A video trigger to progressive lines.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:
CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED indicating that interlaced is selected as the
custom format for the A video trigger.
2-306
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
This command sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger.
Use this command only when the video format is set to custom. This is equivalent
to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu, setting Custom for Format, and
selecting the Scan Rate from the drop-down menu.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
{RATE15K|RATE20K|RATE25K|RATE35K|RATE50K}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN?
Arguments
RATE15 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through
20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate.
RATE20 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through
25 kHz.
RATE25 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz through
35 kHz
RATE35 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz through
50 kHz
RATE50 argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz through
65 kHz
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:SCAN RATE15 sets the scan rate of the A trigger
custom video to Rate 1, which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate).
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:SCAN? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:
CUSTOM:SCAN RATE20 indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom
video is set to Rate20, which is 20 kHz to 25 kHz.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat
Sets or queries the analog HDTV video signal format on which to trigger.
Conditions
Group
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-307
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Arguments
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat
{HD1080P24|HD720P60|HD480P60|HD1080I50|HD1080P25|HD1080I60|HD1080PSF24}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat?
Table 2-37: Available HDTV formats
HDTV format
Description
1080I50
1125 Lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel,
interlaced, 60 fps
1080I60
1125 lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel,
interlaced, 50 fps
1080P24
1125 lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel,
progressive, 24 fps
1080P25
1125 lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel,
progressive, 25 fps
1080SF24
1125 Lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel,
progressive (sF), 24 fps
720P60
750 lines (720 active), 1280 x 720 pixel,
progressive, 60 fps
480P60
525 lines (480 active), 640 or 704 x 480
pixel, progressive, 60 fps
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD
This command sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields.
Conditions
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD <NR3>
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD?
Arguments
2-308
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
<NR3> argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments of 0.5. The
argument sets the number of fields that the instrument waits before rearming
the video trigger.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD? might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD 5 indicating that the instrument is set
to wait 5 video fields before rearming the trigger.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD 4.5 sets the instrument to wait 4.5 video
fields before rearming the trigger.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
This command sets or returns the video line number on which the instrument
triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig
menu, selecting Line # in the Trigger on box, and setting the line number. Use the
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD} command to actually trigger the instrument
on the line that you specify with this command.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
<NR1> argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the
instrument triggers. The following table lists the valid choices, depending on the
active video standard.
Table 2-38: Video Line Numbering Ranges
Video Standard
Line Number Rabge
CUSTOM
4–3000
NTSC
1–263 (odd) and 264–525 (even
PAL
1–625
SECAM
1–625
HD480P60
1–520
HD720P60
1–750
HD1080150
1–1125
HD1080160
1–1125
HD1080P24
1–1125
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-309
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-38: Video Line Numbering Ranges, (cont.)
Examples
Video Standard
Line Number Rabge
HD1080P25
1–1125
HD1080SF24
1–1125
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 23 sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE? might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 10
indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
This command sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
Arguments
POSitive argument sets the instrument to trigger on a positive video sync pulse.
NEGative argument sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video sync pulse.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the instrument to trigger on a
negative video pulse.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY? might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on a positive video sync
pulse.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the A video trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu and selecting a channel
from the Source drop-down menu.
Conditions
2-310
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH<x>}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
Examples
CH<x> argument specifies one of the input channels of the instrument as the A
video trigger. The value of x ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1 sets the source for A video trigger to Channel
1.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE? might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOURCE CH2
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
This command sets or returns the video standard.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {CUSTom|NTSc|PAL|
SECAM|HDtv|EIA343}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard?
Arguments
CUSTom argument sets the instrument to use custom video horizontal scan rate
parameters that you set with the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN command.
NTSc argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC
525/60/2:1 standard (a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz).
PAL argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC
625/50/2:1 standard (a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz).
SECAM argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet the
SECAM standard.
HDtv argument sets the instrument to trigger on an HDTV format.
EIA343 argument sets the instrument to trigger on EIA343 format.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-311
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC sets the instrument to trigger on
NTSC-standard video signals.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD? might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANDARD
HDTV indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on an HDTV format.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
This command sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects.
Conditions
This command requires a DPO4VID application module.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}
{ODD|EVEN|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMERic}
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}?
Arguments
ODD argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd fields.
EVEN argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video even fields.
ALLFields argument sets the instrument to trigger on all fields.
ALLLines argument sets the instrument to trigger on all video lines.
NUMERic argument sets the instrument to trigger on the video signal line specified
by the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE command.
Examples
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD EVEN sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger
on even fields.
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD? might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields.
TRIGger:B
This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of minimum and maximum. The
query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters. This command is
similar to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
then viewing the current setups.
Group
2-312
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:B SETLevel
TRIGger:B?
TRIGger:A
SETLevel sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
TRIGGER:B SETLEVEL sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
TRIGGER:B? might return the following B trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE; LEVEL -220.0000E-3;BY
TIME;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC; :TRIGGER:B:TIME
16.0000E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
TRIGger:B:BY
This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified
number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger. This is
equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu,
selecting the A →B Seq tab, and then choosing Trig After Time or Trig on nth
event.
NOTE. The traditional Runs After functionality is now served by the Horizontal
Delay function. For details, see the HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe and
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe commands.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe}
TRIGger:B:BY?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:B:TIMe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:
MODe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger
events after the A trigger occurs. The number of events is specified by
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt.
TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event. The time
period is specified by TRIGger:B:TIMe.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-313
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
TRIGGER:B:BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger
event.
TRIGGER:B:BY? might return :TRIGGER:B:BY EVENTS indicating that the B
trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger
occurs.
TRIGger:B:EDGE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the source, slope, and coupling for B trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu and viewing the current Source, Slope, and Coupling settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:B:EDGE:
SOUrce
Examples
TRIGGER:B:EDGE? might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1; SLOPE
RISE;COUPLING DC
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
This command sets or returns the type of coupling for the B trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu and choosing the setting from the Coupling drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
DC selects DC trigger coupling.
HFRej selects high-frequency reject coupling.
LFRej selects low-frequency reject coupling.
2-314
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity.
Examples
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING DC selects DC for the B trigger coupling.
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING? might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING
ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling.
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or returns the slope for the B trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu
and choosing the Slope.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
RISe argument specifies the trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
FALL argument specifies the trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Examples
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE FALL sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling
slope.
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE? might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope.
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the source for the B trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
choosing the desired setting from the Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>|EXT}
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-315
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source. Input channels
are specified by x, which can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
EXT specifies an external trigger (using the Auxiliary Trigger Input connector,
located on the rear panel of the instrument) as the B trigger source.
Examples
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the input source for the B
trigger.
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1.
TRIGger:B:EVENTS? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current B trigger events parameter. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu, selecting the A →B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and viewing
the Trig Event setting.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Related Commands
Examples
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS? might return
:TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2
indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs.
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
This command sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B
trigger (when TRIG:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS). This command is equivalent
to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A
→B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and setting the desired Trig Event value.
Group
2-316
Trigger
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
<NR1> is the number of B trigger events, which can range from 1 to 10,000,000.
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 4 specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger
events after the A trigger.
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT? might return :TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2
indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger
can occur.
TRIGger:B:LEVel
This command sets or returns the level for the B trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu,
selecting the A →B Seq tab and setting the B Trig Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
TRIGger:B:LEVel?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:B, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the B trigger level, in volts.
Examples
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL ECL sets the B trigger level to -1.3 V.
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL? might return :TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 173.0000E-03
indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-317
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the B trigger level for the specified channel. Each
Channel can have an independent Level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies the ECL high level.
TTL specifies the TTL high level.
<NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Examples
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH2
1.3000E+00 indicating that the B edge trigger is set to 1.3 V for channel 2.
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL:CH3 TTL sets the B edge trigger to TTL high level for
channel 3.
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel
selected. Each channel can have an independent level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
TRIGger:B:STATE
This command sets or returns the state of B trigger activity. If the B trigger state is
on, the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence. If the B trigger state is off,
then only the A trigger causes the trigger event.
2-318
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
TRIGger:B:STATE?
Related Commands
Arguments
TRIGger:A:MODe
ON argument indicates that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events
conjunction with the A trigger.
OFF argument indicates that only the A trigger causes trigger events.
<NR1>
A 0 turns off the B trigger; any other value activates the B trigger.
Examples
TRIGGER:B:STATE ON sets the B trigger to active, making it capable of causing
trigger events.
TRIGGER:B:STATE? might return :TRIGGER:B:STATE 0 indicating that the B
trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events.
TRIGger:B:TIMe
This command sets or returns B trigger delay time. The B Trigger time applies
only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe. This command is equivalent to selecting B
Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing the A®B Seq tab,
and setting Trig Delay.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:TIMe <NR3>
TRIGger:B:TIMe?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:B:BY, TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
<NR3> is the B trigger delay time in seconds.
TRIGGER:B:TIME 4E-6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 µs.
TRIGGER:B:TIME? might return :TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9 indicating
that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-319
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
TRIGger:B:TYPe
This command sets or returns the type of B trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing Edge.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE
TRIGger:B:TYPe?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
TRIGger:A:TYPe
EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge.
TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge.
TRIGGER:B:TYPE? might return :TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE.
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets the upper threshold for the channel selected. Each channel can
have an independent level. Used for the following trigger types: runt, slew rate
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?
Arguments
ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the clock level, in volts.
TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the current state of the triggering system. This
command is equivalent to viewing the trigger status LEDs on the instrument
front panel.
2-320
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:STATE?
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Returns
ARMED indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information.
AUTO indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data
even in the absence of a trigger.
DPO indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode.
PARTIAL indicates that the A trigger has occurred and the instrument is waiting
for the B trigger to occur.
READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the
instrument is ready to accept a trigger.
SAVE indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring data.
TRIGGER indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post trigger
information.
Examples
TRIGGER:STATE? might return :TRIGGER:STATE ARMED indicating that the
pretrigger data is being acquired.
*TST? (Query Only)
This query-only command tests (self-test) the GPIB interface and returns a 0.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TST?
Examples
*TST? always returns 0.
UNLock (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel. The command is
equivalent to LOCk NONe.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-321
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
NOTE. If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLock
command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI-IEEE Std 488.1-1987
Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on
RL State Descriptions.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
UNLock ALL
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
LOCk
ALL specifies that all front-panel buttons and knobs are unlocked.
UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front-panel buttons and knobs.
VERBose
This command sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of
keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments.
NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk). However, this command does make a
corresponding change in the Response Header Enable State of the opposite
interface (physical or virtual GPIB interface). Refer to Introduction for more
information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
VERBose {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Related Commands
Arguments
HEADer, *LRN?, SET?
OFF sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full-length keywords for
applicable setting queries.
ON sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimum-length keywords for
applicable setting queries.
<NR1>
2-322
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
A 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries; any other
value returns full-length keywords.
Examples
VERBOSE ON enables the Verbose state.
VERBOSE? might return :VERBOSE 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled.
*WAI (No Query Form)
The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the instrument from
executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate
an OPC message are complete. This command allows you to synchronize the
operation of the instrument with your application program. For more information,
refer to Synchronization Methods.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*WAI
Related Commands
Examples
BUSY?, *OPC
*WAI prevents the instrument from executing any further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
WAVFrm? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for the
waveform as specified by the DATA:SOUrce command. This command is
equivalent to sending both WFMOutpre? and CURVe?, with the additional
provision that the response to WAVFrm? is guaranteed to provide a synchronized
preamble and curve.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WAVFrm?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-323
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
WAVFRM? might return the waveform data as: :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y;
PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 400.0000E-12; XZERO
0.0000;XUNIT "s";YMULT 4.0000E-3; YOFF 0.0000;YZERO
0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1,DC coupling,
100.0mV/div, 200.0ns/div, 5000 points,Sampl mode";
:CURVE51,50,51,48,51,48,50,49,51,49,51,48,51,48,51,49,50,49,50,48,49,49
WFMInpre? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the waveform formatting specification to be
applied to the next incoming CURVe command data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre?
Related Commands
Examples
WFMOutpre?
WFMINPRE? might return the waveform formatting as :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR
8;BN_FMTRI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT
Y; PT_OFF 0;XINCR 2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6; XUNIT "s";YMULT
1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000; YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the
waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination command. This specification is
only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
2-324
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
<NR1> number of bits per data point can be 8, 16 ( RI, RP) or 32 (FP).
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16, for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
WFMINPRE:BIT_NR? might return :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8 indicating that
incoming RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point.
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
This command sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP}
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
RI specifies signed integer data point representation.
RP specifies positive integer data point representation.
Examples
WFMINPRE:BN_FMT FP specifies that incoming data will be interpreted as
single-precision binary floating point numbers.
WFMINPRE:BN_FMT? might return :WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RI indicating that the
incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers.
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the first ordered
waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination command. This specification is
only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
is set to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-325
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
<NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2 (RI, RP) or 4 (FP).
WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMINPRE:BYT_NR? might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 2 indicating that there
are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point.
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
This command sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted
first for incoming waveform data when data points require more than one byte.
This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is greater than 1.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.
MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.
Examples
WFMINPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming
waveform data to be transmitted first.
WFMINPRE:BYT_OR? might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_OR LSB indicating that the
least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be transmitted first.
WFMInpre:ENCdg
This command sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data.
Group
2-326
Waveform Transfer
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMInpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
ASC specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format.
BIN specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further
interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR, BIT_NR, BN_FMT, and
BYT_OR.
Examples
WFMINPRE:ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII
format.
WFMINPRE:ENCDG? might return :WFMINPRE:ENCDG BIN indicating that the
incoming waveform data is in binary format.
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
This command sets or returns the number of data points that are in the transmitted
waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1>
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
<NR1> is the number of data points if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to Y. It is the
number of min-max pairs if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to ENV.
WFMINPRE:NR_PT 5000 specifies that 5000 data points will be transmitted.
WFMINPRE:NR_PT? might return :WFMINPRE:NR_PT 8000 indicating that there
are 8000 data points in the transmitted waveform record.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-327
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
This command sets or returns the point format of the incoming waveform data.
Regardless of the argument used, the scale, offset, and so on are interpreted
similarly. When ENV is used, waveform data is interpreted over the min-max
pair; when Y is used, it is interpreted over a single point.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt {ENV|Y}
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mide as maximum
and minimum point pairs. Only Y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute
coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n-PT_Off)
Ynmax = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmax - YOFf)
Ynmin = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmin - YOFf)
Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only Y values are explicitly
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (N-PT_Off)
Yn = YZEro + YMUlt (Yn - YOFf)
Examples
WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to
enveloped.
WFMINPRE:PT_FMT? might return :WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV indicating that the
waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs.
WFMInpre:PT_Off
The set form of this command is ignored. The query form always returns a 0 if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is on or displayed. If the waveform is not
displayed, the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244. This
command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
2-328
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:PT_Off
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Arguments are ignored.
WFMInpre:WFId (No Query Form)
This command (no query form) accepts but ignores the argument. This command
is provided only to allow a waveform extracted from the instrument to be easily
imported.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:WFId <QString>
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Arguments
<QString> must be a valid IEEE-488.2 string (but the contents are ignored).
Examples
WFMINPRE:WFID "CH1, DC COUPLING, 2.000V/DIV, 400.0NS/DIV,
500 POINTS, SAMPLE MODE" is a syntactically correct command.
WFMInpre:XINcr
This command sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform
points in units specified by WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3>
WFMInpre:XINcr?
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-329
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr?
<NR3> is the horizontal interval representation.
WFMINPRE:XINCR 3E-3 sets the interval between Incoming waveform points
to 3 ms.
WFMINPRE:XINCR? might return :WFMINPRE:XINCR 1.0000E-3 indicating
that if WFMInpre:XUNit is set to "s", there is a 1 ms interval between incoming
waveform points.
WFMInpre:XUNit
This command sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:XUNit <QString>
WFMInpre:XUNit?
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Arguments
<QString> contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
Examples
WFMINPRE:XUNIT "HZ" specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming
waveform are hertz.
WFMINPRE:XUNIT? might return :WFMINPRE:XUNIT "s" indicating that the
horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
WFMInpre:XZEro
This command sets or returns the sub-sample time between the trigger sample
(designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger on the incoming
waveform. This value is used to compute TTOFF for the incoming waveform, and
is expressed in terms of WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
2-330
Waveform Transfer
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
WFMInpre:XZEro <NR3>
WFMInpre:XZEro?
Related Commands
WFMInpre:PT_Off, WFMInpre:XINcr, WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Arguments
<NR3> argument is a floating point value that ranges from –WFMInpre:XINcr to 0.
Examples
WFMINPRE:XZERO 5.7E-6 specifies that the trigger actually occurred 5.7 µs
before the sample designated by WFMInpre:PT_Off.
WFMINPRE:XZERO? might return :WFMINPRE:XZEro 7.5000E-6 indicating
that the trigger occurs 7.5 µs before the sample designated by WFMInpre:PT_Off.
WFMInpre:YMUlt
This command sets or returns the vertical scale factor (in units/digitizing level)
for the reference waveform, specified by DATa:DESTination, upon a CURVe
command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YMUlt <NR3>
WFMInpre:YMUlt?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YUNit
<NR3> is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform
points.
WFMINPRE:YMULT? might return :WFMINPRE:YMULT 40.0000E-3 indicating
that the vertical scale is 40 mV/digitizing level (1V/div).
WFMINPRE:YMULT 20E-3 specifies that (if WFMInpre:YUNit is "V"
and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing level
(500 mV/div).
WFMInpre:YOFf
This command sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in
digitizing levels. Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical
position of the waveform. For those formats in which WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-331
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
important (all non-floating point formats), this command must take the location of
the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YOFf <NR3>
WFMInpre:YOFf?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YMUlt, WFMOutpre:YOFf?
<NR3> is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.
WFMINPRE:YOFF50 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming
waveform is 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions) above the center of the data range.
WFMINPRE:YOFF? might return :WFMINPRE:YOFF 25 indicating the vertical
position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels.
WFMInpre:YUNit
This command sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YUNit <QString>
WFMInpre:YUNit?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
<QString> contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
WFMINPRE:YUNIT? might return :WFMINPRE:YUNIT "s" indicating the vertical
units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
WFMINPRE:YUNIT "PA" specifies that the vertical units for the incoming
waveform are Pascal.
2-332
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMInpre:YZEro
This command sets or returns the offset of the incoming waveform in units
specified by WFMInpre:YUNit. Variations in this number are analogous to
changing the vertical offset of the waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMInpre:YZEro <NR3>
WFMInpre:YZEro?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
WFMInpre:YUNit, WFMOutpre:YZEro?
<NR3> is the offset in YUNits.
WFMINPRE:YZERO 1.5E+0 specifies that the zero reference point for the
incoming waveform is 1.5 V below the center of the data range (given that
WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
WFMINPRE:YZERO? might return :WFMINPRE:YZEro 7.5000E-6 indicating
that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7.5 µV below the center of
the data range (given that WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
WFMOutpre? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The preamble components
are considered to be of two types; formatting and interpretation. The
formatting components are: ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr.
The interpretation components are derived from the DATa:SOUrce specified
waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre?
Examples
WFMOUTPRE?? might return the waveform formatting data as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG
BIN;NR_PT 500; PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0; XINCR
8.0000E-9;XZERO 4.8794E-9; XUNIT "s";YMULT -2000.0000E-3;
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-333
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
YOFF -4999.9995E-3;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1, DC
coupling, 2.000V/div, 400.0ns/div,500 points, Sample mode"
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
This command sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that
outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note
that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This
specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP. An error is generated if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
<NR1> number of bits per data point can be 8, 16, 32 or 64.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8 indicating that
outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point.
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
This command sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is generated if the waveform
specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP}
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt ?
Related Commands
2-334
DATa:SOUrce
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Arguments
RI specifies signed integer data point representation.
RP specifies positive integer data point representation.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT FP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in
single-precision binary floating point format.
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI indicating that
the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be constrained
according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is only meaningful
when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to
either RI or RP. An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
Related Commands
Arguments
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
<NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2, 4 or 8. A value of 1
or 2 bytes per waveform point indicates channel data; 4 bytes per waveform point
indicate math data; 8 bytes per waveform point indicate pixel map (DPO) data.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2 indicating that
there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
This command sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted
first, during a waveform data transfer, when data points require more than one byte.
This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN. An
error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-335
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
Related Commands
Arguments
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.
MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform
data to be transmitted first.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB indicating that
the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
This command sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms. An
error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
Related Commands
Arguments
DATa:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
ASC specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms internally
stored as integers will be sent as <NR1> numbers, while those stored as floating
point will be sent as <NR3> numbers.
BIN specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further
specification is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or.
Examples
2-336
WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG? might return :WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BIN indicating that
outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent
in ASCII format.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the number of points for the DATa:SOUrce
waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe? query. An error is
generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Related Commands
Examples
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt
WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000 indicating that
there are 5000 data points to be sent.
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the point format for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. The format specifies a set of equations describing
how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe
data points. An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce
is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:SOUrce
Examples
WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT? might return :WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV indicating that
the waveform data is a series of min-max pairs.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-337
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? (Query Only)
This query-only command always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by
DATa:SOUrce is on or displayed. If the waveform is not displayed, the query
form generates an error and returns event code 2244. This command is listed for
compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only)
This query-only command specifies whether the source waveform is Fast
Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 200 (vertical) by
500 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that
screen location. Only CURVe? query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition
waveforms.
When the WFMOutpre:PT_OR query returns Column, this indicates that
the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each of 500 possible
horizontal columns being transmitted contains 200 vertical points). When the
WFMOutpre:PT_OR? query returns Linear, this indicates that the source is
not a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each horizontal column being sent
contains only one vertical point). Note that waveform points are transmitted in
the following order: top to bottom, then left to right. An error is generated if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return :WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER COL specifying
that the waveform designated by the DATa:SOUrce waveform is a Fast
Acquisition waveform.
WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return :WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER LINEAR
specifying that the source waveform is a non-Fast Acquisition waveform.
2-338
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:WFId? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns a string describing several aspects of the
acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Related Commands
Returns
DATa:SOUrce
<QString> comprises the following comma-separated fields documented in
the tables below:
Table 2-39: Waveform Suffixes
Field
Description
Examples
Source
The source identification string as it appears in
the front-panel scale factor readouts.
“CH1–4”
“Math1–3
“Ref1–4"
Coupling
A string describing the vertical coupling of the
waveform (the Source1 waveform in the case of
Dual Waveform Math).
“AC coupling”
“DC couplng”
“GND coupling”
Vert Scale
A string containing the vertical scale factor of
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion
will always be four digits. The examples cover
all known internal units.
“100.0 mV/div”
“20.00 dB/div”
“45.00 deg/div”
“785.4 mrad/div”
“500.0 µVs/div”
“10.00 kV/s/div”
“200.0 mV/div”
“50.00 unk/div”
Horiz Scale
A string containing the horizontal scale factor of
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion
will always be four digits. The examples cover
all known internal units.
“100 ms/div”
“10.00 kHz/div”
“50.00 c/div”
Record Length
A string containing the number of waveform
points available in the entire record. The
numeric portion is given as an integer.
“500 points”
“500000 points”
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-339
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Table 2-39: Waveform Suffixes, (cont.)
Examples
Field
Description
Examples
Acquisition Mode
A string describing the mode used to acquire
the waveform.
“Sample mode”
“Pk Detect mode”
“Hi Res mode”
“Envelope mode”
“Average mode”
Primary Reference
Offset
A string specifying the delta between the
Primary Reference (typically the A trigger) and
the CURVe? zero reference identified by a
combination of PT, Off and XZEro in units of
XUNits. For example, in Trigger After Delay, this
number would be the actual time between the A
and B triggers. In the event that this number is
not meaningful, the string will be exactly “0”.
“57.2345 ms”
“87.3 Hz”
“0”
WFMOUTPRE:WFID? might return :WFMOUTPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC
coupling,100.0mVolts/div,500.0µs/div,500 points, Hi Res
mode"
WFMOutpre:XINcr? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of
WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
This value corresponds to the sampling interval. An error is generated if the
waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Related Commands
Examples
2-340
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOUTPRE:XINCR? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6
indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point (500 µs/div).
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is generated if the waveform specified
by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "HZ" indicating that
the horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz.
WFMOutpre:XZEro? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger
sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value is in units
of WFMOutpre:XUNit. An error is generated if the waveform specified by
DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
NOTE. During (i.e., ACQuire:STATE OFF), this is the only preamble that changes
on each acquisition. If a query is run during steady state operation (that is, all
control changes have settled and triggers are arriving on a regular basis), the
XZEro value of the last stopped state is returned.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? might return :WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9 indicating
that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the trigger sample.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-341
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level
in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is
important (all non-floating point formats), WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the
location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration. An error is
generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:YMULT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3 indicating
that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV/div.
WFMOutpre:YOFf? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical offset in digitized levels for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which
BYT_NR is important (all non-floating point formats), this command must take the
location of the binary point implied by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr into consideration.
An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Related Commands
Examples
2-342
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0 indicating
that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions)
below center screen.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. An error is generated if the waveform specified by
DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce
WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "dB" indicating that
the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.
WFMOutpre:YZEro? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the vertical offset in units specified by
WFMOutpre:YUNit? for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce is not turned on.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Related Commands
Examples
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:YUNit?
WFMOUTPRE:YZERO? might return :WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3
indicating that vertical offset is set to -100 mV.
ZOOm? (Query Only)
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live
traces. The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning
and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-343
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Syntax
Examples
ZOOm?
ZOOM?? might return :ZOOM:MODE 0;GRATICULE:SIZE 80;SPLIT
EIGHTYTWENTY:ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION STOP; LOCK 0;SPEED
1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1; SCROLLLOCK 1;CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000; SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSTION0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000; SCALE
1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000; SCALE
5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;...
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE? (Query Only)
This queries returns the size, in percent, of the Zoom (lower) graticule. The query
always returns 80.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE??
Examples
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE?? always returns :ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE 80
indicating that the zoom graticule size is set to 80%.
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit? (Query Only)
This returns the sizes of the acquisition and zoom windows when Zoom is
selected. The query always returns EIGHTYTWENTY.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit??
Related Commands
2-344
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Examples
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT?? always returns :ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT
EIGHTYTWENTY, indicating that the display area is divided 80%/20% between the
zoomed graticule and the acquisition graticule.
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
This command turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom query returns the current
state of Zoom mode. This command is equivalent to pressing the ZOOM button
located on the front panel.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE} {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}
Arguments
ON turns on Zoom mode.
OFF turns off Zoom mode.
<NR1> = 0 turns off Zoom mode; any other value turns on Zoom mode.
Examples
ZOOM:MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode.
ZOOM:MODE? might return :ZOOM:MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is
currently turned on.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>? (Query Only)
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces of
the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired
zoom window. The ZOOm?? query returns the current vertical and horizontal
positioning and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?
Examples
ZOOM:ZOOM1? might return :ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1;SCROLLLOCK
1; CH1:HORIZONTAL POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 5;
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000; SCALE
1.0000; :ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSTION 50.0000;
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-345
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
SCALE 5; :ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.000; SCALE
1.0000; :ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION50.000; SCALE
5;:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:VERTICAL... indicating the Zoom1 transforms for
all traces.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:FACtor? (Query Only)
This query-only command returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:FACtor?
Returns
<NR1> is the zoom factor of a zoom box.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition
This command sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom,
where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition?
Arguments
Examples
<NR3> is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the waveform that is to the
left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 1× or greater.
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50 sets the Zoom1 reference pointer at
50% of acquired waveform.
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return
:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000 indicating that the Zoom1
reference pointer is currently set at 50% of acquired waveform.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle
This command sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale factor for the specified
zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
2-346
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle?
Arguments
<NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1-2 -5 increments.
Examples
ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5 sets the horizontal scale factor of Channel
1 to 5.
ZOOM:ZOOM2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return
:ZOOM2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 1, indicating that the horizontal
scale factor is 1.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition
This command sets the horizontal position of a particular zoom box, in terms of 0
to 100.0% of upper window
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition?
Arguments
<NR3> is the horizontal position as a percent of the upper window.
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle
This command sets or returns the horizontal scale of the particular zoom box.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle <NR3>
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle?
Arguments
<NR3> is the horizontal scale of the zoom box.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
2-347
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE
This command sets or returns the specified zoom on or off, where x is an integer
from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Default is Zoom1 on, Zoom2 - 4 off.
Group
Zoom
Syntax
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE?
Arguments
ON turns Zoom 1-4 on.
OFF turns Zoom 1-4 off.
<NR1> = 0 disables the specified zoom; any other value enables the specified
zoom.
Examples
ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATE ON turns Zoom1 on.
ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATE? might return :ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE 1 indicating that
Zoom2 is on.
2-348
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB
interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within
the instrument.
The instrument status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers and two
queues for each interface. The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers
and components. They also explain how the event handling system operates.
Registers
Overview
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
Status Registers contain information about the status of the instrument. They
include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).
Status Registers
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the instrument is in use. IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an
execution error or message available. When an event of a given type occurs, the
instrument sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can
disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers).
Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR records eight types of
events that can occur within the instrument. Use the *ESR? query to read the
SESR register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.
NOTE. TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events,
including some front panel actions.
Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-1
Status and Events
Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions
Bit
Function
7 (MSB)
PON
Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on.
On completion, the diagnostic tests also set this bit.
6
URQ
User Request. Indicates that an application event has
occurred. *See note.
5
CME
Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while the
oscilloscope was parsing a command or query.
4
EXE
Execution Error. Shows that an error executing a command
or query.
3
DDE
Device Error. Shows that a device error occurred.
2
QYE
Query Error. Either an attempt was made to read the Output
Queue when no data was present or pending, or that data in
the Output Queue was lost.
1
RQC
Request Control. This is not used.
0 (LSB)
OPC
Operation Complete. Shows that the operation is complete.
This bit is set when all pending operations complete
following an *OPC command.
The Status Byte Register (SBR). Records whether output is available in the
Output Queue, whether the instrument requests service, and whether the SESR
has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.
Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)
Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions
Bit
3-2
7 (MSB)
Function
———— Not used.
6
RQS
Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows that
the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller.
6
MSS
Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB? query.
Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions, (cont.)
Enable Registers
Bit
Function
5
ESB
Event Status Bit. Shows that status is enabled and present
in the SESR.
4
MAV
Message Available. Shows that output is available in the
Output Queue.
3
2
———— Not used.
———— Not used.
1–0
———— Not used.
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable
Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). This register controls which
types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.
Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). This register controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE
command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.
Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-3
Status and Events
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). This register controls which bits
in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status
Summary (MSS) bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the
register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is
read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.
Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)
*PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile
memory through a power cycle.
Note: To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.
Queues
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
Output Queue
The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this
queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command (or
query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.
CAUTION. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,
the instrument normally clears the first response and outputs the second while
reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A
fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well. To
avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response immediately
after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.
3-4
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Event Queue
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events. If more than 32
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 32nd event is replaced by event code
350, "Queue Overflow."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it
from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized
by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties
the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.
Event Handling Sequence
The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system. In the
explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-5
Status and Events
Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event
is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the
ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER
is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).
3-6
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Synchronization Methods
Overview
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately after being
received by the instrument, some commands start a process that requires more
time. For example, once a single sequence acquisition command is executed,
depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings, it may be a few seconds
before the acquisition is complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is
in process, the instrument will continue processing other commands. This means
that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation.
A first operation must complete before the next one gets processed. The
instrument status and event reporting system provides ways to do this.
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
use the following command sequence to do this:
/** Set up conditional acquisition **/
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT: IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/** Take amplitude measurement **/
MEASUREMENT: MEAS1:VALUE
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the instrument takes an amplitude measurement (see the following
figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.
Figure 3-7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization
To ensure the instrument completes waveform acquisition before taking the
measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-7
Status and Events
Figure 3-8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the instrument with
your application program: *WAI, BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC
Using the *WAI Command
The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate
an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC
message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement*/
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
instrument, but the commands will not be processed by the instrument until all
OPC operations in process are complete. If the input buffer becomes full, the
controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.
Using the BUSY Query
3-8
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument is busy
processing a command that has an extended processing time such as
single-sequence acquisition.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
While BUSY keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and the
repeated BUSY? query will result in more bus traffic.
Using the *OPC Command
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register
will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with
serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-9
Status and Events
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement.*/
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request
Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is
complete, a Service Request will be generated.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC
The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The SRQ,
when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
3-10
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming.
Using the *OPC? Query
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates
an OPC message is complete. A time out could occur if you try to read the output
queue before there is any data in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC
Wait for read from Output Queue.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,
you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.
Messages
Overview
The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming
interface messages the instrument generates in response to commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument gives more detail
about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part
of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the
SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message
is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR
bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error message text.
No Event
The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status
to report. These have no associated SESR bit.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-11
Status and Events
Table 3-3: No Event Messages
Command Error
Code
Message
0
No events to report; queue empty
1
No events to report; new events pending *ESR?
The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper
syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules
in the section on command Syntax.
Table 3-4: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)
3-12
Code
Message
100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
111
Header separator error
112
Program mnemonic too long
113
Undefined header
114
Header suffix out of range
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in number
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
128
Numeric data not allowed
130
Suffix error
131
Invalid suffix
134
Suffix too long
138
Suffix not allowed
140
Character data error
141
Invalid character data
144
Character data too long
148
Character data not allowed
150
String data error
151
Invalid string data
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-4: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5), (cont.)
Execution Error
Code
Message
158
String data not allowed
160
Block data error
161
Invalid block data
168
Block data not allowed
170
Command expression error
171
Invalid expression
178
Expression data not allowed
The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of
a command.
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Code
Message
200
Execution error
201
Invalid while in local
202
Settings lost due to RTL
210
Trigger error
211
Trigger ignored
212
Arm ignored
219
Trigger delay not available
220
Parameter error
221
Settings conflict
222
Data out of range
223
Too much data
224
Illegal parameter value
225
Out of memory
230
Data corrupt or stale
240
Hardware error
241
Hardware missing
244
Invalid parameter selected
250
Mass storage error
251
Missing mass storage
252
Missing media
253
Corrupt media
254
Media full
255
Directory full
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-13
Status and Events
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4), (cont.)
3-14
Code
Message
256
File name not found
257
File name error
258
Media protected
260
Execution expression error
261
Math error in expression
2200
Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201
Measurement error, No period found
2203
Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204
Measurement error, Low signal amplitude
2205
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206
Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207
Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208
Measurement error, Waveform does not cross Mid Ref
2209
Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210
Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211
Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref Crossing
2212
Measurement error, No negative crossing
2213
Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214
Measurement error, No crossing
2215
Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217
Measurement error, Constant waveform
2218
Measurement error, Unused
2219
Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm sample
2220
Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm cross
2221
Measurement error, No valid edge – No trigger cross
2222
Measurement error, No valid edge – No second cross
2223
Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
2225
Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226
Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227
Measurement error, Positive and Negative Clipping
2228
Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229
Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230
Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2231
Measurement error, no statistics available
2241
Waveform request is invalid
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4), (cont.)
Device Error
Code
Message
2243
This measurement cannot be performed on this type of waveform
2244
Source waveform is not active
2248
This ref cannot be activated
2249
Reference deletion error, Waveform in use for math
2250
Reference error, Waveform reference file is invalid
2251
Reference error, Waveform preamble does not match actual
2252
Reference error, Source waveform is not valid
2253
Reference error, Too many points received
2254
Reference error, Too few points received
2259
File too big
2261
Calibration error, wait for the warmup interval to expire before invoking SPC
2400
Not enough memory available
2401
This channel cannot be activated
2402
Math/Meas/Histo have circular definition
2410
Empty math string
2411
Syntax error in math string
2412
Semantic error in math string
2413
Math expression is too complex
2420
Histogram cannot be performed on this type of waveform
The following table lists the device errors that can occur during instrument
operation. These errors may indicate that the instrument needs repair.
Table 3-6: Device Error Messages (DDE Bit 3)
System Event
Code
Message
300
Device–specific error
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
313
Calibration memory lost
314
Save/recall memory los
315
Configuration memory lost
350
Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)
The following table lists the system event messages. These messages are
generated whenever certain system conditions occur.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
3-15
Status and Events
Table 3-7: System Event Messages
Execution Warning
Code
Message
400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of
command execution. These notify you that you may get unexpected results.
Table 3-8: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Internal Warning
Code
Message
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid min max
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
551
FASTAcq mode is active – deactivate to use math
The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
instrument.
Table 3-9: Internal Warning Messages
3-16
Code
Message
600
Internal warning
630
Internal warning, 50Ω overload
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Programming Examples
Programming Examples
Overview
Three example programs, which demonstrate methods that you can use to control
the instrument through the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB), are included
on your DPO4000 Series Product Software CD. These example programs are
installed as part of the GPIB Programmer installation, which includes the
DPO4000 Series Oscilloscope Programmer Online Guide.
To install the "GPIB Programmer", perform the following procedure:
1. Insert the DPO4000 Series Product Software CD in your CD drive.
2. Open the folder named GPIB Programmer.
3. Double-click Setup.exe.
4. Follow the Install Wizard directions.
An Examples directory will be created with the following path name:C:\Program
Files\TekScope\Programmer\Examples
Within the Examples directory are two subdirectories, Source and Programs.
Source contains the source files, written in Microsoft Visual C++ , Version 6.0,
which is required to build executable files for each of the following example
programs:
Meas.c – This example program demonstrates how to perform a periodic
amplitude measurement on CH 1 of your instrument.
GetWfm.c – This example program demonstrates how to acquire and output
the CH 1 waveform in a 500-point RIBANARY format. The program then
queries the instrument to get the waveform preamble information, formats the
binary waveform data as ASCII values, and, finally, writes out a report of the
waveform preamble and ASCII data points to a file named WFM_DATA.PRN.
Tl.c – This example program demonstrates how to use a general talker/listener
program to allow the user to send commands and queries to the instrument
and display the responses.
A README file in the Source directory has the latest documentation.
Programs contains compiled, executable files for each of the example programs in
the Source directory (see above).
The programs run on a PC-compatible system equipped with a National
Instruments GPIB board and associated drivers.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
4-1
Programming Examples
Compiling GPIB Programs
The example GPIB programs make the following assumptions:
The GPIB controller board is "GPIB0" (board 0). If you have more than one
GPIB controller in your workstation, and you want to user a GPIB controller
other than board 0, you must edit the source files accordingly.
The instrument is connected to the GPIB controller (see above) and is set to
address 1 (DEV1). If you want to use another address, then you must edit
the source files accordingly.
Each program requires adding the following source files to the associated VC++
project (which you will create).
GPIBERR.C
GPIBREAD.C
GPIBWAIT.C
GPIBWRIT.C
In addition to the above source files, you will also need to add the following
files provided by National Instruments:
decl-32.h
gpib-32.obj
Visual C++
To make an executable for any of the example programs in the Source directory,
perform the following steps:
1. Install Microsoft Visual C++, Version 6.0.
2. Install the National Instruments GPIB board and drivers.
3. Copy the following source files from your National Instruments GPIB drivers
directory to this directory ("Examples\Source"):
decl-32.h
gpib-32.obj
1. Create a new "Win32 Console Application" project in Visual C++ located in
this directory ("Examples\Source"). For example, if you want to build the
Talker/Listener application, select this directory for the location, and enter a
suitable name for the project, such as TL.
2. Add the following Visual C++ source files to the project:
4-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Programming Examples
..\GPIBERR.C
..\GPIBREAD
..\GPIBWAIT.C
..\GPIBWRIT.C
1. Add the following source files provided by National Instruments to the project:
..\decl-32.h
..gpib-32.obj
1. Add the appropriate program main source file to the project (see Overview
for a list of the three source files).
2. Build and test the project.
3. To build another of the example projects, repeat steps 4 through 8.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
4-3
Programming Examples
4-4
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Character Set
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
A-1
Appendix A: Character Set
A-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Reserved Words
Reserved Words
*CAL
*CLS
*DDT
*ESE
*ESR
*IDN
*LRN
*OPC
*OPT
*PSC
*PUD
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*STB
*TRG
*TST
*WAI
A
ABSolute
ACQLENGTH
ACQuire
ACTIVeprinter
ADD
ADDRess
ADDress
ALIas
ALIas
ALL
ALLEv
AUTOContrast
AUTOSet
AUTOZero
AUXout
B
BACKLight
BANdwidth
BELl
BITRate
BIT_Nr
BN_Fmt
BOX
BRIghtness
This is a list of reserved words for the DPO4000 Series instruments. Capital letters
identify the required minimum spelling. For the most robust code, use the full
spelling, since spelling rules may change over time and among instrument models.
BUS
BUSY
BY
BYT_Nr
BYT_Or
CAL
CALibrate
CAN
CATalog
CH
CH2
CH4
CLAss
CLEAR
CLEARMenu
CLEARSNapshot
CLOCK
CLOCk
CONDition
CONTRAst
CONTROl
COPy
COUNt
COUPling
CREATE
CURSor
CURVe
CUSTom
CWD
D
DATA
DATE
DATa
DEFIne
DEFine
DEGAUss
DELEte
DELEte
DELTa
DELTatime
DELay
DELete
DESE
DESKew
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
DESTination
DHCPbootp
DIAg
DIR
DIREction
DIRection
DISPLAY
DISplay
DNS
DOMAINname
DOTsonly
DUE
EDGE
ENCdg
END
ENET
ETHERnet
EVENT
EVENTS
EVMsg
EVQty
FACtor
FACtory
FASTAcq
FIELD
FILEFormat
FILESystem
FLAg
FOCUS
FORCERange
FORMAt
FORMat
FPANEL
FRAMEtype
FREE
FREESpace
FUNCtion
Frequency
GAIN
GATEWay
GATing
GPIBUsb
GRAticule
HARDCopy
HBArs
HDR
HDtv
HEADer
HIGH
HIGHLimit
HOLDTime
HOLDoff
HORZ
HORizontal
HORizontal
HOURs
HPOS
HTTPPort
HWVersion
I2C
ID
IDentifier
IMAGe
IMMed
IN
INCRement
INDICators
INKSaver
INPut
INTENSITy
INTERNal
INVert
IPADDress
LANGuage
LAYout
LESSLimit
LEVel
LINE
LIST
LOCk
LOG
LOGIc
LOOP
LOW
LOWLimit
LOWerthreshold
MAG
MAIn
B-1
Appendix B: Reserved Words
MAIn
MARK
MARKSINCOLumn
MATH
MATHVAR
MAXSamplerate
MAXimum
MEAN
MEAS
MEASUrement
MESSage
METHod
MID
MID2
MINImum
MISO
MKDir
MODE
MODe
MORELimit
MOSI
NAME
NEWpass
NOTIfy
NR_Pt
NTIMes
NUMACq
NUMAVg
NUMEnv
NUMHORZ
NUMVERT
OFFSet
OPTion
OUT
OWNer
PASSWord
PATtern
PERCent
PERSistence
PICture
POLARity
POLarity
POSITION
POSition
B-2
PRESS
PREVIEW
PREViewstate
PRINTer
PRObe
PT_Fmt
PT_ORder
PT_Off
PULSEWIDth
PULSEWidth
PULse
QUALifier
RECAll
RECOrdlength
REF
REFLevel
REM
REName
RESOlution
RESUlt
RESistance
RESults
RISEFall
RMDir
ROLL
RUNT
SAMPLERate
SAMPLEpoint
SAVe
SCAN
SCAle
SCLK
SDATA
SEARCH
SECdiv
SELect
SELected
SERnumber
SET
SETADDress
SETHold
SETID
SETTime
SETUp
SHOW
SIGnal
SIZE
SIZe
SLEWRate
SLOpe
SNAPShot
SOURCE
SOURCE2
SOUrce
SPC
SPECTral
SPI
SPLit
SS
STANdard
STARt
STATE
STATIstics
STATUS
STATe
STATus
STArtuptime
STDdev
STEPSTAtus
STEPSTIMulus
STOP
STOPAfter
STRing
STYle
STsetting
SUBNETMask
SYNC
TEKSecure
TEMPerature
TERmination
THREshold
THReshold
TIME
TIMe
TOTAL
TOTal
TOTaluptime
TRANsition
TRIGger
TURN
TYPE
TYPe
TYsetting
Trigger
UNITs
UNIts
UNLock
UPPerthreshold
USE
VALue
VAR
VBArs
VDELTa
VECtorscope
VERBose
VERT
VERTical
VIDeo
Voltage
WAVEform
WAVFrm
WEIghting
WFId
WFMInpre
WFMOutpre
WHEn
WIDth
WINdow
XINcr
XUNit
XY
XZEro
YCHannel
YEARs
YMUlt
YOFf
YREF
YUNit
YUNits
YZEro
ZOOM
ZOOm
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
### Writer’s note: These default setup values need to updated for the DPO4000.
The ones now shown are really just for the TDS5000.. The following tables list
the default setup values by command group. The instrument sets these values
when you press the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button or sending the FACtory
command. Only those commands that have values set by the DEFAULT SETUP
function are listed in these tables.
Note: The following commands do not affect the DATa parameters: TEKSecure,
*RST, RECALL:SETUP FACtory. These are the initial factory default settings
for DATa :DATA:DESTINATION REF1;ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE
CH1;START 1;STOP 5000;FRAMESTART 1;FRAMESTOP 5000.
Acquisition Default Values
The following table lists the Acquisition factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG
16
ACQUIRE:NUMENV
10
ACQUIRE:NUMSAMPLES
16000
ACQUIRE:SAMPLINGMODE
IT
ACQUIRE:STATE
1 (ON)
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP
FASTACQ:STATE
0
Alias Default Values
The following table lists the Alias factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ALIAS:STATE
0 (OFF)
Cursor Default Values
The following table lists the Cursor factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
CURSOR:FUNCTION
VBARS
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
300.0000E-3
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2
-300.0000E-3
CURSOR:LINESTYLE
SOLID
CURSOR:MODE
INDEPENDENT
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-1
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
CURSOR:SCREEN:STYLE
LINES
CURSOR:SOURCE1
CH1
CURSOR:SOURCE2
CH1
CURSOR:STATE
0
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS
SECONDS
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:SOURCE2
CH1
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE
LINE_X
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:UNITS
BASE
CURSOR:XY:READOUT
RECTANGULAR
CURSOR:XY:RECTX1
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTX2
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTY1
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTY2
0.0000
Diagnostics Default Values
The following table lists the Diagnostics factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DIAG:LEVEL
SUBSYS
Dispaly Default Values
The following table lists the Display factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DISPLAY:CLOCK
1
DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW
NORMAL
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CARET
150,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH1
180,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH2
300,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH3
60,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH4
240,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:HISTOGRAM320,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASK
C-2
0,25,75
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
140,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASKHIGHLIGHT
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH1
160,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH2
40,60,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH3
120,60,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH4
195,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF1
0,90,0
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF2
0,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF3
60,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF4
240,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR
DEFAULT
DISPLAY:CURSORTICK
SHORT
DISPLAY:FILTER
SINX
DISPLAY:FORMAT
YT
DISPLAY:GRATICULE
FULL
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVER
1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 75.0000
75.0000
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:RECORDVIEW
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
OFF
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:YPOS
5
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:YPOS
20
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS
35
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:YPOS
5
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:YPOS
65
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:YPOS
80
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME
""
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-3
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:YPOS
95
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME
""
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:YPOS
110
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE
0
DISPLAY:STYLE
VECTORS
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR
SHORT
DISPLAY:TRIGT
1
DISPLAY:VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3
Email Default Values
The following table lists the Email setup values.
Command
Default Values
EMAIL:ATTEMPTS
1
EMAIL:AUTHLOGIN
""
EMAIL:FROM
"TDS5054B_<Instrument Serial Number>"
EMAIL:HOSTWANTED
""
EMAIL:IMAGE
0
EMAIL:LIMIT
0
EMAIL:MASK
0
EMAIL:MAXSIZE
1
EMAIL:MEASUREMENT
0
EMAIL:NUMEMAILS
1
EMAIL:SMTPPORT
25
EMAIL:SMTPSERVER
""
EMAIL:TIMEOUT
30
EMAIL:TO
""
EMAIL:TRIGGER
0
EMAIL:WAVEFORM
0
Hard Copy Default Values
The following table lists the Hard Copy factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
HARDCopy:FILEName
""
HARDCopy:PORT
FILE
Histogram Default Values
The following table lists the Histogram factory default setup values.
C-4
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
Command
Default Values
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY
LINEAR
HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION
HORIZONTAL
HISTOGRAM:SIZE
2.0000
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE
CH1
HISTOGRAM:STATE
0
Horizontal Default Values
The following table lists the Horizontal factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE
0
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION
50.0000
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME
0.00000000000
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH
5000
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 1
:FRAMESTART:CH<1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 1
:FRAMESTART:MATH<1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 1
:FRAMESTART:REF<1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES OFF
:MODE
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 2
:NUMFRAMES:CH1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 2
:NUMFRAMES:MATH<1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES 2
:NUMFRAMES:REF<1-4>
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:READOUTS
0
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME
1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE
CH1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH2
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH3
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH1 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH2 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH3 2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-5
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH4 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF2 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF3 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF4 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE
0
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME
NONE
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK
LIVE
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION
50.0000
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
400.0000E-9
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
5000
HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION
5000
HORIZONTAL:ROLL
AUTO
Limit Test Default Values
The following table lists the Limit Test factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
LIMIT:BEEP
0
LIMIT:COMPARE:<CH1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:COMPARE:REF<1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:EMAIL
0
LIMIT:HARDCOPY
0
LIMIT:HIGHLIGHTHITS
1
LIMIT:LOCK
1
LIMIT:LOG
0
LIMIT:SAVEWFM
0
LIMIT:SRQ
0
LIMIT:STATE
0
LIMIT:STOPONVIOLATION
0
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL 40.0000E-3
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:VERTICAL
40.0000E-3
Mask Default Values
The following table lists the Mask factory default setup values.
C-6
Command
Default Values
MASK:AUTOADJUST
10
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
MASK:AUTOADJUST:HDELTA
10
MASK:AUTOADJUST:VDELTA
10
MASK:AUTOSET:AUTOADJUST
1
MASK:AUTOSET:HPOS
1
MASK:AUTOSET:HSCALE
1
MASK:AUTOSET:MODE
MANUAL
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ
1
MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD
NONE
MASK:AUTOSET:TRIGGER
1
MASK:AUTOSET:VPOS
1
MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE
1
MASK:COUNT:STATE
0
MASK:DISPLAY
1
MASK:FILTER
0
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS
1
MASK:INVERT
0
MASK:LOCK
1
MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT
5.0000
MASK:MARGIN:STATE
0
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPLITUDE
100.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCALE
200.0000E-9
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS
500.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS
1
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
0
MASK:MASKPRE:RECORDLENGTH
5000
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSET
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCALE
1.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDTH
0.0000
MASK:POLARITY
POSITIVE
MASK:SOURCE
CH1
MASK:STANDARD
NONE
MASK:STOPONVIOLATION
0
MASK:TEST:BEEP:COMPLETION
0
MASK:TEST:BEEP:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:DELAY
0.0000
MASK:TEST:HARDCOPY
0
MASK:TEST:LOG:FAILURE
0
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-7
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
MASK:TEST:REPEAT
0
MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD
1
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM
0
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM:FILENAME
"C:/TekScope/Waveforms/"
MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION
0
MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:STATE
0
MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD
1
MASK:TEST:WAVEFORM
20
MASK:USER:AMPLITUDE
100.0000E-3
MASK:USER:BITRATE
1544000
MASK:USER:HSCALE
200.0000E-9
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS
500.0000E-3
MASK:USER:LABEL
"User Mask"
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS
1
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS
0
MASK:USER:RECORDLENGTH
5000
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP
0.0000
MASK:USER:VOFFSET
0.0000
MASK:USER:VPOS
0.0000
MASK:USER:VSCALE
1.0000E-3
MASK:USER:WIDTH
0.0000
Math Default Values
The following table lists the Math factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
MATH<1-4>:DEFINE
""
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:NAME
""
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:YPOS
<1> 600.0000E-3
<2> 200.0000E-3
<3> -200.0000E-3
<4> -600.0000E-3
C-8
MATH<1-4>::NUMAVG
2
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:CENTER
312.5000E+6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS
0.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEWIDTH
2.0000E-6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:LOCK
0
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:MAG
DB
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:PHASE
DEGREES
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVEL
20.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET
223.6000E-3
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:RESBW
1000.0000E+3
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SPAN
625.0000E+6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS
-200.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP
0
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
GAUSSIAN
MATH<1-4>:UNITSTRING
"V"
MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
MATHVAR:VAR<1-8>
0.0000
Measurement Default Values
The following table lists the Measurement factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
MEASUREMENT:GATING
OFF
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION
FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1
RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2
RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:NOISE
HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
90.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
10.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1
CH1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2
CH1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
UNDEFINED
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:DIRECTIONFORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE1
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
RISE
C-9
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE2
RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:METHOD
HISTOGRAM
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:NOISE
HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH9
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW1
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID15
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE1
CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE2
CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:STATE
0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:TYPE
UNDEFINED
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
ALL
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING
32
Miscellaneous Default Values
The following table lists the Miscellaneous factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ALIAS:STATE
0 (OFF)
AUXOUT:EDGE
FALLING <cannot change>
AUXOUT:SOURCE
ATRIGGER
CMDBATCH
1 (ON)
HEADER
1 (ON)
LOCK
NONE
ROSC:SOURCE
INTERNAL
VERBOSE
1 (ON)
Save and Recall Default Settings
The following table lists the Save and Recall factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL
Trigger Default Values
C-10
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
The following table lists the Trigger factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:BITRATE
1544000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY
RISE
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CODE
NRZ
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:TYPE DATA
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD
CUSTOM
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING
DC
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE
RISE
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY
DEFAULT
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
1.5000E-6
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
PATTERN
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
AND
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT5.0000E-9
5.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCECH2
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH1
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME
3.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:<CH1-4>
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:MODE
AUTO
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-11
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:TRIGIF
ACCEPT
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4>
HIGH
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH<1-4>
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY
POSITIVE
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN
WITHIN
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4>
HIGH
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:<CH1-4>
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW
C-12
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:WHEN
OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TYPE
EDGE
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:SCAN
RATE1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE
1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY
NORMAL
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SCAN
RATE1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD
NTSC
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
TRIGGER:B:BY
EVENTS
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING
DC
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE
RISE
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT
2
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL
0.0000
TRIGGER:B:STATE
0
TRIGGER:B:TIME
16.0000E-9
TRIGGER:B:TYPE
EDGE
Vertical Default Values
The following table lists the Vertical factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
CH<1-4>:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6
CH<1-4>:COUPLING
DC
CH<1-4>:DESKEW
0.0000
CH<1-4>:INVERT
0
CH<1-4>:LABEL:NAME
""
CH<1-4>:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
CH<1-4>:LABEL:YPOS
<1> 2.2000
<2> 1.8000
<3> 1.4000
<4> 1.000
CH<1-4>:OFFSET
0.0000
CH<1-4>:POSITION
0.0000
CH<1-4>:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000
CH<1-4>:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS
"V"
CH<1-4>:SCALE
100.0000E-3
CH<1-4>:TERMINATION
1.0000E+6
DATA:DESTINATION
REF1
DATA:ENCDG
RIBINARY
DATA:FRAMESTART
1
DATA:FRAMESTOP
5000
DATA:SOURCE
CH1
DATA:START
1
DATA:STOP
5000
REF1:LABEL:NAME
""
REF1:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF1:LABEL:YPOS
-1.0000
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
C-13
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
REF2:LABEL:NAME
""
REF2:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF2:LABEL:YPOS
-1.4000
REF3:LABEL:NAME
""
REF3:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF3:LABEL:YPOS
-1.8000
REF4:LABEL:NAME
""
REF4:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF4:LABEL:YPOS
-2.2000
SELECT:CH1
1
SELECT:CH2
0
SELECT:CH3
0
SELECT:CH4
0
SELECT:CONTROL
CH1
SELECT:MATH<1-4>
0
SELECT:REF<1-4>
0
Waveform Default Values
The following table lists the Waveform factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DATA:DESTINATION
REF1
DATA:ENCDG
RIBINARY
DATA:FRAMESTART
1
DATA:FRAMESTOP
5000
DATA:SOURCE
CH1
DATA:START
1
DATA:STOP
5000
Zoom Default Values
The following table lists the Zoom factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE
80
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT
EIGHTYTWENTY
ZOOM:MODE
0
ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION
STOP
ZOOM:SCROLL:LOCK
0
ZOOM:SCROLL:SPEED
1
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
C-14
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE
1
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE
0
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
1.0000
C-15
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
ZOOM:ZOOM3:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM3:STATE
0
90.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
90.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000
90.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION0.0000
C-16
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM4:STATE
0
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Appendix D: GPIB Interface Specifications
GPIB Interface
Specifications
Overview
This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the instrument.
Normally, you will not need this information to use the instrument, but this
information may be useful if you are connecting to controllers with unusual
configurations.
GPIB Functions
The following table lists the GPIB interface functions and electrical function
subsets supported by this instrument and a brief description of each function.
Interface Messages
The following table shows the standard interface messages that the instrument
supports.
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
D-1
Appendix D: GPIB Interface Specifications
D-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Glossary
ASCII
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Controllers transmit commands to the instrument using ASCII character encoding.
Address
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Glossary-1
Glossary
Glossary-2
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
A
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?, 2-51
ACQuire?, 2-51
ACQuire:MODe, 2-52
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-53
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-53
ACQuire:NUMEnv, 2-54
ACQuire:STATE, 2-54
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-55
Acquisition commands
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?, 2-51
ACQuire?, 2-51
ACQuire:MODe, 2-52
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-53
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-54
ACQuire:NUMEnv, 2-54
ACQuire:STATE, 2-55
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-55
FASTAcq?, 2-130
FASTAcq:STATE, 2-131
Alias commands
ALIas, 2-56
ALIas[:STATE], 2-59
ALIas:CATalog?, 2-57
ALIas:DEFine, 2-57
ALIas:DELEte, 2-58
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe], 2-58
ALIas:DELEte:ALL, 2-58
ALIas, 2-56
ALIas[:STATE], 2-59
ALIas:CATalog?, 2-56
ALIas:DEFine, 2-57
ALIas:DELEte, 2-58
ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe], 2-58
ALIas:DELEte:ALL, 2-58
ALLEv?, 2-59
AUTOSet, 2-60
AUXout?, 2-60
AUXout:EDGE, 2-61
AUXout:SOUrce, 2-61
B
BELl, 2-62
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate, 2-62
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe, 2-63
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-63
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce, 2-64
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt, 2-64
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:POSition, 2-66
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:POLARity, 2-67
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce, 2-67
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
POLARity, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:SOUrce, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:POLARity, 2-66
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-66
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce, 2-69
BUS:B<x>:STATE, 2-69
BUS:B<x>:TYPE, 2-70
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-70
BUS?, 2-62
BUSY?, 2-70
C
CAL?, 2-71
*CAL?, 2-72
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?, 2-73
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs, 2-73
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTAtus?, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus?, 2-75
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-76
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?, 2-76
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Frequency?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Trigger?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Voltage?, 2-79
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?, 2-79
CALibrate:TEMPerature?, 2-79
CALibrate:FACtory, 2-72
CALibrate:INTERNal, 2-75
Index-1
Index
CALibrate:RESults?, 2-77
Calibration and Diagnostic commands
CAL?, 2-71
*CAL?, 2-72
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?, 2-73
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs, 2-73
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus?, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTAtus?, 2-74
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus?, 2-75
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-76
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?, 2-76
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Frequency?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Trigger?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:Voltage?, 2-79
CALibrate:RESults:FACtory?, 2-78
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?, 2-79
CALibrate:TEMPerature?, 2-79
CALibrate:FACtory, 2-72
CALibrate:INTERNal, 2-75
CALibrate:RESults?, 2-77
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes, 2-109
DIAg:SELect:<function>, 2-111
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion, 2-108
DIAg:LOOP:STOP, 2-109
DIAg:MODe, 2-109
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-110
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-110
DIAg:SELect:ALL, 2-111
DIAg:STATE, 2-112
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-80
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-81
CH<x>:DESKew, 2-82
CH<x>:INVert, 2-82
CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-83
CH<x>:POSition, 2-84
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero, 2-85
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss, 2-85
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?, 2-87
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?, 2-87
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?, 2-87
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-88
Index-2
CH<x>:PRObe?, 2-85
CH<x>:SCAle, 2-89
CH<x>:TERmination, 2-90
CH<x>:YUNits, 2-90
CH<x>?, 2-80
CLEARMenu, 2-90
*CLS, 2-91
Command Groups, 2-11
Cursor commands
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-93
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?, 2-96
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-97
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?, 2-99
CURSor?, 2-91
CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-92
CURSor:HBArs?, 2-93
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?, 2-93
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts, 2-94
CURSor:HBArs:USE, 2-94
CURSor:MODe, 2-95
CURSor:VBArs?, 2-95
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, 2-96
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts, 2-97
CURSor:VBArs:USE, 2-98
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-93
CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>?, 2-96
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>, 2-97
CURSor:VBArs:VDELTa?, 2-99
CURSor?, 2-91
CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-92
CURSor:HBArs?, 2-93
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?, 2-93
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts, 2-94
CURSor:HBArs:USE, 2-94
CURSor:MODe, 2-95
CURSor:VBArs?, 2-95
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, 2-96
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts, 2-97
CURSor:VBArs:USE, 2-98
CURVe, 2-99
D
DATa, 2-100
DATa:DESTination, 2-101
DATa:ENCdg, 2-102
DATa:SOUrce, 2-104
DATa:STARt, 2-105
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
DATa:STOP, 2-105
DATE, 2-106
*DDT, 2-107
DESE, 2-107
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes, 2-109
DIAg:SELect:<function>, 2-111
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion, 2-108
DIAg:LOOP:STOP, 2-109
DIAg:MODe, 2-109
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-110
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-110
DIAg:SELect:ALL, 2-111
DIAg:STATE, 2-111
Display commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight, 2-115
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule, 2-115
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform, 2-115
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast, 2-117
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness, 2-117
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst, 2-118
DISplay:PICture:STATE, 2-118
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly, 2-119
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE, 2-119
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting, 2-120
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe, 2-120
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting, 2-120
DISplay?, 2-112
DISplay:CLOCk, 2-113
DISplay:FORMat, 2-113
DISplay:GRAticule, 2-114
DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-114
DISplay:PERSistence, 2-116
DISplay:XY:MODe, 2-121
DISplay:XY:YCHannel, 2-122
DISplay:XY:YREF, 2-122
MESSage:BOX, 2-199
MESSage:CLEAR, 2-200
MESSage:SHOW, 2-200
MESSage:STATE, 2-204
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight, 2-115
DISplay:INTENSITy:GRAticule, 2-115
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform, 2-115
DISplay:PICture:AUTOContrast, 2-116
DISplay:PICture:BRIghtness, 2-117
DISplay:PICture:CONTRAst, 2-118
DISplay:PICture:STATE, 2-118
DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly, 2-119
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
DISplay:VECtorscope:STATE, 2-119
DISplay:VECtorscope:STsetting, 2-119
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYPe, 2-120
DISplay:VECtorscope:TYsetting, 2-120
DISplay?, 2-112
DISplay:CLOCk, 2-113
DISplay:FORMat, 2-113
DISplay:GRAticule, 2-114
DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-114
DISplay:PERSistence, 2-116
DISplay:XY:MODe, 2-121
DISplay:XY:YCHannel, 2-122
DISplay:XY:YREF, 2-122
E
*ESE, 2-123
*ESR?, 2-124
Ethernet commands
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress, 2-125
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?, 2-125
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress, 2-126
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp, 2-124
ETHERnet:DOMAINname, 2-125
ETHERnet:HTTPPort, 2-126
ETHERnet:IPADDress, 2-126
ETHERnet:NAME, 2-127
ETHERnet:PASSWord, 2-127
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, 2-128
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress, 2-125
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?, 2-125
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress, 2-126
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp, 2-124
ETHERnet:DOMAINname, 2-125
ETHERnet:HTTPPort, 2-126
ETHERnet:IPADDress, 2-126
ETHERnet:NAME, 2-127
ETHERnet:PASSWord, 2-127
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, 2-128
EVENT?, 2-128
EVMsg?, 2-128
EVQty?, 2-129
F
FACtory, 2-129
FASTAcq?, 2-130
FASTAcq:STATE, 2-131
Index-3
Index
File System commands
FILESystem:FREESpace?, 2-134
FILESystem?, 2-131
FILESystem:COPy, 2-132
FILESystem:CWD, 2-133
FILESystem:DELEte, 2-133
FILESystem:DIR?, 2-134
FILESystem:MKDir, 2-134
FILESystem:REName, 2-135
FILESystem:RMDir, 2-135
FILESystem:FREESpace?, 2-134
FILESystem?, 2-131
FILESystem:COPy, 2-132
FILESystem:CWD, 2-132
FILESystem:DELEte, 2-133
FILESystem:DIR?, 2-134
FILESystem:MKDir, 2-134
FILESystem:REName, 2-135
FILESystem:RMDir, 2-135
FPANEL:PRESS, 2-136
FPANEL:TURN, 2-137
G
GPIBUsb:ADDress?, 2-137
GPIBUsb:HWVersion, 2-138
GPIBUsb:ID?, 2-138
GPIBUsb:SETADDress, 2-138
GPIBUsb:SETID, 2-138
GPIBUsb:STATUS, 2-138
H
Hard Copy commands
HARDCopy, 2-139
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter, 2-139
HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD, 2-141
HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete, 2-141
HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST?, 2-141
HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName, 2-142
HARDCopy:INKSaver, 2-140
HARDCopy:LAYout, 2-140
HARDCopy:PREVIEW, 2-140
HARDCopy, 2-139
HARDCopy:ACTIVeprinter, 2-139
HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD, 2-141
HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete, 2-141
HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST?, 2-141
Index-4
HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName, 2-142
HARDCopy:INKSaver, 2-139
HARDCopy:LAYout, 2-140
HARDCopy:PREVIEW, 2-140
HDR, 2-142
HEADer, 2-143
Horizontal commands
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe, 2-145
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?, 2-144
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?, 2-147
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, 2-148
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?, 2-149
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?, 2-148
HORizontal:PREViewstate?, 2-149
HORizontal:RECOrdlength, 2-149
HORizontal:RESOlution, 2-150
HORizontal?, 2-144
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe, 2-145
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe, 2-146
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition?, 2-147
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle, 2-147
HORizontal:MAIn?, 2-145
HORizontal:ROLL?, 2-150
HORizontal:[MAIn]:DELay:STATe, 2-145
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?, 2-144
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?, 2-147
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, 2-148
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?, 2-149
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?, 2-148
HORizontal:PREViewstate?, 2-149
HORizontal:RECOrdlength, 2-149
HORizontal:RESOlution, 2-150
HORizontal?, 2-144
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe, 2-145
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe, 2-146
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition?, 2-146
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle, 2-147
HORizontal:MAIn?, 2-144
HORizontal:ROLL?, 2-150
I
ID?, 2-151
*IDN?, 2-151
J
JIS, 2-203
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
L
LANGuage, 2-152
LANGuage:INCRement, 2-152
LOCk, 2-152
*LRN?, 2-153
M
Mark commands
MARK, 2-154
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:OWNer?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:STARt?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:STATe?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?, 2-157
MARK:CREATE, 2-154
MARK:DELEte, 2-154
MARK:FREE?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:END?, 2-155
MARK:TOTal?, 2-157
MARK, 2-154
MARK:SELected:FOCUS?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:OWNer?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:SOURCE?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:STARt?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:STATe?, 2-156
MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition?, 2-157
MARK:CREATE, 2-154
MARK:DELEte, 2-154
MARK:FREE?, 2-155
MARK:SELected:END?, 2-155
MARK:TOTal?, 2-157
Math commands
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition, 2-158
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-159
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs, 2-159
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG, 2-160
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow, 2-161
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition, 2-162
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle, 2-163
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs, 2-164
MATH[1]:DEFIne, 2-157
MATH[1]:TYPe, 2-161
MATHVAR:VAR<x>, 2-165
MATHVAR?, 2-164
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition, 2-158
MATH[1]:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-159
MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNITs, 2-159
MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG, 2-160
MATH[1]:SPECTral:WINdow, 2-160
MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition, 2-162
MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle, 2-163
MATH[1]:VERTical:UNITs, 2-164
MATH[1]:DEFIne, 2-157
MATH[1]:TYPe, 2-161
MATHVAR:VAR<x>, 2-164
MATHVAR?, 2-164
Measurement commands
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot, 2-166
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction, 2-168
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-168
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?, 2-167
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE, 2-169
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2, 2-170
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, 2-170
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?, 2-175
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?, 2-175
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?, 2-176
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?, 2-176
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?, 2-177
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE, 2-177
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?, 2-178
MEASUrement:INDICators?, 2-176
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?, 2-179
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:
DIREction, 2-179
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:
EDGE<x>, 2-180
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?, 2-179
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], 2-182
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2, 2-183
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE, 2-183
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?, 2-184
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-184
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, 2-189
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?, 2-189
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?, 2-178
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:
HIGH, 2-191
Index-5
Index
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW, 2-192
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID, 2-193
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:
MID2, 2-193
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, 2-194
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:
HIGH, 2-195
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW, 2-196
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID, 2-196
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2, 2-197
MEASUrement:REFLevel?, 2-191
MEASUrement:SNAPShot, 2-198
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE, 2-198
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting, 2-199
MEASUrement?, 2-165
MEASUrement:GATing, 2-166
MEASUrement:IMMed?, 2-167
MEASUrement:METHod, 2-190
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot, 2-166
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction, 2-167
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-168
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?, 2-167
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE, 2-169
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2, 2-169
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, 2-170
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?, 2-175
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?, 2-175
MEASUrement:INDICators:HORZ<x>?, 2-176
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ?, 2-176
MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT?, 2-177
MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE, 2-177
MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>?, 2-178
MEASUrement:INDICators?, 2-176
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?, 2-179
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction, 2-179
Index-6
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-180
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?, 2-179
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?, 2-181
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], 2-182
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2, 2-182
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE, 2-183
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?, 2-184
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-184
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, 2-189
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?, 2-189
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?, 2-178
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH, 2-191
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW, 2-192
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID, 2-192
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2, 2-193
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, 2-194
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, 2-195
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW, 2-195
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID, 2-196
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2, 2-197
MEASUrement:REFLevel?, 2-191
MEASUrement:SNAPShot, 2-198
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE, 2-198
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting, 2-199
MEASUrement?, 2-165
MEASUrement:GATing, 2-166
MEASUrement:IMMed?, 2-167
MEASUrement:METHod, 2-190
MESSage:BOX, 2-199
MESSage:CLEAR, 2-200
MESSage:SHOW, 2-200
MESSage:STATE, 2-204
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
Miscellaneous commands
AUTOSet, 2-60
AUXout?, 2-60
AUXout:EDGE, 2-61
AUXout:SOUrce, 2-61
BELl, 2-62
CLEARMenu, 2-91
DATE, 2-106
*DDT, 2-107
FPANEL:PRESS, 2-136
FPANEL:TURN, 2-137
GPIBUsb:ADDress?, 2-137
GPIBUsb:HWVersion, 2-138
GPIBUsb:ID?, 2-138
GPIBUsb:SETADDress, 2-138
GPIBUsb:SETID, 2-138
GPIBUsb:STATUS, 2-138
HDR, 2-142
HEADer, 2-143
ID?, 2-151
*IDN?, 2-151
LANGuage, 2-152
LANGuage:INCRement, 2-152
LOCk, 2-152
*LRN?, 2-153
NEWpass, 2-204
REM, 2-212
SET?, 2-250
STArtuptime?, 2-252
TEKSecure, 2-252
TIME, 2-253
TOTaluptime?, 2-253
*TRG, 2-254
*TST?, 2-321
UNLock, 2-322
VERBose, 2-322
N
NEWpass, 2-204
O
*OPC, 2-205
*OPT?, 2-206
P
*PSC, 2-206
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
*PUD, 2-206
R
*RCL, 2-207
RECAll:SETUp, 2-208
RECAll:WAVEform, 2-208
REF<x>:DATE?, 2-209
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition, 2-209
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-210
REF<x>:TIMe?, 2-210
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, 2-210
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle, 2-211
REM, 2-212
*RST, 2-213
S
*SAV, 2-213
Save and Recall commands
FACtory, 2-130
*RCL, 2-207
RECAll:SETUp, 2-208
RECAll:WAVEform, 2-208
*SAV, 2-214
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-214
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-217
SAVe:IMAGe, 2-214
SAVe:SETUp, 2-215
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-216
SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-214
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-216
SAVe:IMAGe, 2-214
SAVe:SETUp, 2-215
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-216
Search commands
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS, 2-219
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:CONDition, 2-219
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-220
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-220
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-221
Index-7
Index
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-221
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-222
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe, 2-222
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue, 2-223
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:ADDRess:MODe, 2-223
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:ADDRess:TYPe, 2-223
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:ADDRess:VALue, 2-224
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:CONDition, 2-224
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:DATa:DIRection, 2-225
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-225
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
SPI:CONDition, 2-226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-227
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
SPI:DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue, 2-227
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue, 2-227
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SOUrce, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SLOpe, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SOUrce, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LEVel, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
CH<x>, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
MATH, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
REF<x>, 2-230
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FUNCtion, 2-230
Index-8
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CH<x>, 2-231
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-231
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-231
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:MATH, 2-232
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
INPut:REF<x>, 2-232
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:CH<x>, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:MATH, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:INPut:REF<x>, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn, 2-234
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:CH<x>, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:MATH, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:REF<x>, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:MATH, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:REF<x>, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-238
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-238
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
PULSEWidth:WIDth, 2-239
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity, 2-239
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce, 2-240
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WHEn, 2-240
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:THReshold, 2-242
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
DATa:SOUrce, 2-242
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
DATa:THReshold, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
HOLDTime, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
SETTime, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-245
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-246
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:MATH, 2-246
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
UPPerthreshold:REF<x>, 2-247
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:
TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn, 2-245
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-218
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS, 2-219
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:CONDition, 2-219
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-220
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-220
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-221
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-221
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-221
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:MODe, 2-222
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:
CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:VALue, 2-222
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:MODe, 2-223
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:TYPe, 2-223
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
ADDRess:VALue, 2-224
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
CONDition, 2-224
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:DIRection, 2-225
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:SIZe, 2-225
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:
DATa:VALue, 2-226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
CONDition, 2-226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa:SIZe, 2-227
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa{:MISO|:IN}:VALue, 2-226
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:
DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}:VALue, 2-227
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:
SOUrce, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SLOpe, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:
SOUrce, 2-228
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
CH<x>, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
MATH, 2-229
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:
REF<x>, 2-230
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FUNCtion, 2-230
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CH<x>, 2-231
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-231
Index-9
Index
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-231
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
MATH, 2-232
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:
REF<x>, 2-232
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:CH<x>, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:MATH, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
INPut:REF<x>, 2-233
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn, 2-234
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:LESSLimit, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:
WHEn:MORELimit, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:CH<x>, 2-235
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:MATH, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
THReshold:REF<x>, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-236
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:MATH, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:
LOWerthreshold:REF<x>, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
POLarity, 2-237
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SOUrce, 2-238
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
WHEn, 2-238
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
WIDth, 2-239
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity, 2-239
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce, 2-240
Index-10
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WHEn, 2-240
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-241
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
CLOCk:THReshold, 2-242
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:
SOUrce, 2-242
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:
THReshold, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
HOLDTime, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
SETTime, 2-243
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-245
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
CH<x>, 2-246
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
MATH, 2-246
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:
REF<x>, 2-247
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:DELTatime, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:POLarity, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:SOUrce, 2-244
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:
RISEFall}:WHEn, 2-245
SELect:BUS<x>, 2-247
SELect:CH<x>, 2-248
SELect:REF<x>, 2-250
SELect?, 2-247
SELect:CONTROl, 2-248
SELect:MATH[1], 2-249
SET?, 2-250
*SRE, 2-251
STArtuptime?, 2-252
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
Status and Error commands
ALLEv?, 2-59
BUSY?, 2-71
*CLS, 2-91
DESE, 2-107
*ESE, 2-123
*ESR?, 2-124
EVENT?, 2-128
EVMsg?, 2-128
EVQty?, 2-129
*OPC, 2-205
*OPT?, 2-206
*PSC, 2-206
*PUD, 2-207
*RST, 2-213
*SRE, 2-251
*STB?, 2-252
*WAI, 2-323
*STB?, 2-252
T
TEKSecure, 2-252
TIME, 2-253
TOTaluptime?, 2-253
*TRG, 2-253
Trigger commands
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate, 2-62
BUS:B<x>:CAN:PRObe, 2-63
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-64
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce, 2-64
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:FORMAt, 2-64
BUS:B<x>:DISPLAY:TYPe, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:I2C{:DATA|:SDATA}:SOUrce, 2-65
BUS:B<x>:POSition, 2-66
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:
POLARity, 2-67
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:IN|:MISO}:SOUrce, 2-67
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
POLARity, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATA{:OUT|:MOSI}:
SOUrce, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:
POLARity, 2-66
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCK|:SCLK}:SOUrce, 2-67
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:POLARity, 2-68
BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce, 2-69
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
BUS:B<x>:STATE, 2-69
BUS:B<x>:TYPE, 2-70
BUS:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-70
BUS?, 2-62
TRIGger, 2-254
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition, 2-256
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
DIRection, 2-257
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
QUALifier, 2-257
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-258
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:
VALue, 2-258
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-259
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:MODe, 2-259
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:
ADDRess}:VALue, 2-260
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:
MODe, 2-260
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:
TYPe, 2-260
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:
VALue, 2-261
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition, 2-261
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:
DIRection, 2-262
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-265
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:
VALue, 2-264
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:
MOSI}:VALue, 2-264
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce, 2-265
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling, 2-266
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-267
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-267
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe, 2-268
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-269
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, 2-270
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-271
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>, 2-273
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-273
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-274
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?, 2-272
Index-11
Index
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2, 2-275
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, 2-275
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, 2-276
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
LESSLimit, 2-277
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
MORELimit, 2-278
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?, 2-274
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:
EDGE, 2-278
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:
SOUrce, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:
THReshold, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:
SOUrce, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:
THReshold, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-281
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-281
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss, 2-283
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:HIGHLimit, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOWLimit, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:
HIGH, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:
LOW, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth, 2-286
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LEVel, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit, 2-290
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity, 2-290
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce, 2-290
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WIDth, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
DELTatime, 2-286
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
HIGHLimit, 2-287
Index-12
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
LOWLimit, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
POLarity, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
SOUrce, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:HIGH, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:LOW, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold?, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
WHEn, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-292
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-293
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth, 2-293
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?, 2-291
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity, 2-294
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-295
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, 2-296
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-297
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-298
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-298
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?, 2-297
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce, 2-299
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold, 2-300
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?, 2-299
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-300
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime, 2-301
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-305
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN, 2-307
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?, 2-306
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:
TYPE}, 2-306
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat, 2-307
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD, 2-308
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE, 2-309
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-310
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-311
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard, 2-311
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}, 2-312
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
DELTatime, 2-302
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
POLarity, 2-302
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
SOUrce, 2-303
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
WHEn, 2-303
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?, 2-301
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, 2-314
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-315
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-315
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, 2-316
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-318
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-318
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-320
TRIGger:A, 2-254
TRIGger:A:BUS, 2-256
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, 2-265
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, 2-268
TRIGger:A:LEVel, 2-269
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, 2-270
TRIGger:A:MODe, 2-282
TRIGger:A:PULse?, 2-282
TRIGger:A:RUNT?, 2-294
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, 2-295
TRIGger:A:SETHold?, 2-296
TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-304
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?, 2-305
TRIGger:B, 2-312
TRIGger:B:BY, 2-313
TRIGger:B:EDGE?, 2-314
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?, 2-316
TRIGger:B:LEVel, 2-317
TRIGger:B:STATE, 2-319
TRIGger:B:TIMe, 2-319
TRIGger:B:TYPe, 2-320
TRIGger:STATE?, 2-321
TRIGger, 2-254
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition, 2-256
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-257
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-257
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-258
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-258
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-258
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:
MODe, 2-259
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentifier|:ADDRess}:
VALue, 2-259
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe, 2-260
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe, 2-260
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue, 2-261
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition, 2-261
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection, 2-262
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition, 2-263
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-265
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:
VALue, 2-264
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:
VALue, 2-264
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce, 2-265
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling, 2-266
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-267
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-267
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe, 2-268
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-269
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, 2-270
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-271
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>, 2-272
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-273
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-273
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?, 2-272
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2, 2-274
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, 2-275
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, 2-276
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
LESSLimit, 2-277
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:
MORELimit, 2-278
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?, 2-274
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-278
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-278
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:
THReshold, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:
THReshold, 2-279
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>, 2-281
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?, 2-280
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-281
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss, 2-283
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:HIGHLimit, 2-283
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOWLimit, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity, 2-284
Index-13
Index
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-284
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn, 2-285
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth, 2-286
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LEVel, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity, 2-290
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:SOUrce, 2-290
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WIDth, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
DELTatime, 2-286
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
HIGHLimit, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
LOWLimit, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
POLarity, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
SOUrce, 2-287
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:HIGH, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold:LOW, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
THReshold?, 2-288
TRIGger:A:PULse{:TRANsition|:SLEWRate}:
WHEn, 2-289
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-291
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-292
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-292
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth, 2-293
TRIGger:A:PULSEWIDth?, 2-291
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity, 2-294
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-295
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, 2-296
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-297
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-298
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-298
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk?, 2-297
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce, 2-299
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold, 2-300
TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa?, 2-299
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-300
Index-14
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime, 2-301
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-305
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN, 2-307
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?, 2-306
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:
TYPE}, 2-306
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HDtv:FORMat, 2-307
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD, 2-308
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE, 2-309
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-310
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-310
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard, 2-311
TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}, 2-312
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:
DELTatime, 2-302
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity, 2-302
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce, 2-303
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn, 2-303
TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}?, 2-301
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, 2-314
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-315
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-315
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, 2-316
TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-318
TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-318
TRIGger:B:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-320
TRIGger:A, 2-254
TRIGger:A:BUS, 2-256
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, 2-265
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, 2-268
TRIGger:A:LEVel, 2-269
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, 2-270
TRIGger:A:MODe, 2-282
TRIGger:A:PULse?, 2-282
TRIGger:A:RUNT?, 2-294
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, 2-295
TRIGger:A:SETHold?, 2-296
TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-304
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?, 2-305
TRIGger:B, 2-312
TRIGger:B:BY, 2-313
TRIGger:B:EDGE?, 2-314
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?, 2-316
TRIGger:B:LEVel, 2-317
TRIGger:B:STATE, 2-318
TRIGger:B:TIMe, 2-319
TRIGger:B:TYPe, 2-320
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Index
TRIGger:STATE?, 2-320
*TST?, 2-321
U
Unicode, 2-203
UNLock, 2-321
V
VERBose, 2-322
Vertical commands
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-80
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-81
CH<x>:DESKew, 2-82
CH<x>:INVert, 2-82
CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-84
CH<x>:POSition, 2-84
CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero, 2-85
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss, 2-85
CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE?, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:FORCERange, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN, 2-86
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?, 2-87
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPE?, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?, 2-87
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-88
CH<x>:PRObe?, 2-85
CH<x>:SCAle, 2-89
CH<x>:TERmination, 2-90
CH<x>:YUNits, 2-90
CH<x>?, 2-80
REF<x>:DATE?, 2-209
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition, 2-209
REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-210
REF<x>:TIMe?, 2-210
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, 2-211
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle, 2-212
SELect:BUS<x>, 2-247
SELect:CH<x>, 2-248
SELect:REF<x>, 2-250
SELect?, 2-247
SELect:CONTROl, 2-249
SELect:MATH[1], 2-249
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
W
*WAI, 2-323
Waveform Transfer commands
CURVe, 2-99
DATa, 2-101
DATa:DESTination, 2-101
DATa:ENCdg, 2-102
DATa:SOUrce, 2-104
DATa:STARt, 2-105
DATa:STOP, 2-106
WAVFrm?, 2-323
WFMInpre?, 2-324
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, 2-324
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, 2-325
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, 2-325
WFMInpre:BYT_Or, 2-326
WFMInpre:ENCdg, 2-326
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, 2-327
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt, 2-328
WFMInpre:PT_Off, 2-329
WFMInpre:WFId, 2-329
WFMInpre:XINcr, 2-329
WFMInpre:XUNit, 2-330
WFMInpre:XZEro, 2-330
WFMInpre:YMUlt, 2-331
WFMInpre:YOFf, 2-332
WFMInpre:YUNit, 2-332
WFMInpre:YZEro, 2-333
WFMOutpre?, 2-333
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, 2-334
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, 2-334
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, 2-335
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, 2-336
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, 2-336
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, 2-337
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?, 2-337
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-338
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-338
WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-339
WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-340
WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-341
WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-341
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-342
WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-342
WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-343
WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-343
WAVFrm?, 2-323
Index-15
Index
WFMInpre?, 2-324
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, 2-324
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, 2-325
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, 2-325
WFMInpre:BYT_Or, 2-326
WFMInpre:ENCdg, 2-326
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, 2-327
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt, 2-328
WFMInpre:PT_Off, 2-328
WFMInpre:WFId, 2-329
WFMInpre:XINcr, 2-329
WFMInpre:XUNit, 2-330
WFMInpre:XZEro, 2-330
WFMInpre:YMUlt, 2-331
WFMInpre:YOFf, 2-331
WFMInpre:YUNit, 2-332
WFMInpre:YZEro, 2-333
WFMOutpre?, 2-333
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, 2-334
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, 2-334
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, 2-335
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, 2-335
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, 2-336
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, 2-337
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?, 2-337
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-338
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-338
WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-339
WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-340
WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-341
WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-341
Index-16
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-342
WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-342
WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-343
WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-343
Z
Zoom commands
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE?, 2-344
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit?, 2-344
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:FACtor?, 2-346
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition, 2-346
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-347
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition, 2-347
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle, 2-347
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE, 2-348
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?, 2-345
ZOOm?, 2-343
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}, 2-345
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE?, 2-344
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit?, 2-344
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:FACtor?, 2-346
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition, 2-346
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-346
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:POSition, 2-347
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCAle, 2-347
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE, 2-348
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?, 2-345
ZOOm?, 2-343
ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE}, 2-345
First Draft — October 18, 2005 — Kirk Wimmer
DPO4000 Series Programmer Manual
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement